HP 9040 User guide

HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Software Technical Reference
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
Trademark credits
©2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,
PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo®
are US registered marks of the United
States Environmental Protection Agency.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
Edition 1, 10/2004
HP-UX Release 10.20 and later and HPUX Release 11.00 and later (in both 32
and 64-bit configurations) on all HP 9000
computers are Open Group UNIX 95
branded products.
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Torvalds
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Pentium® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction..............................................................................................................................................1
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp ....................................................................................................................2
Printing-system software CD...................................................................................................................6
Software features ...................................................................................................................6
Printing system and installer..................................................................................6
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD for
Windows systems .................................................................................6
Installer features....................................................................................8
HP LaserJet print drivers........................................................................................9
HP PCL 5, PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers........................................9
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems............10
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible printing system.......................11
Additional driver availability.................................................................11
Driver Autoconfiguration.......................................................................................12
Update Now..........................................................................................................12
HP Driver Preconfiguration..................................................................................12
HP LaserJet documentation.................................................................................................12
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide .............................................................13
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp Printing System Install Notes .................................14
HP Embedded Web Server Guide.......................................................................14
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide..........................................................15
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide......................................................................15
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard..........................................................15
Structure and availability of the software CD........................................................................................16
In-box file layout ...................................................................................................................16
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition .....................................................16
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition....................................................16
Availability and fulfillment......................................................................................................17
In-box CDs ..........................................................................................................17
Web deployment .................................................................................................22
Printing-system software ....................................................................22
Standalone drivers .............................................................................22
Other operating systems.....................................................................23
Software component availability .........................................................23
2 Software description
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................25
Supported operating systems ...............................................................................................................26
iii
Technology background information.....................................................................................................27
Driver Configuration .............................................................................................................27
Bidirectional communication ...............................................................................27
Enterprise AutoConfiguration...............................................................................28
HP Driver Preconfiguration...................................................................................................30
Lockable features ................................................................................................31
Euro character .....................................................................................................................31
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Toolbox.......................................................................31
HP Embedded Web Server .................................................................................................32
The HP EWS frame .............................................................................................32
Information tab.....................................................................................................33
Links to off-product solutions ..............................................................................33
Device Status screen ..........................................................................................33
Configuration Page .............................................................................................34
Settings tab..........................................................................................................36
Configure device .................................................................................................36
Alerts....................................................................................................................37
Security................................................................................................................39
Digital Sending tab...............................................................................................39
General................................................................................................39
Send to E-mail.....................................................................................40
Addressing...........................................................................................41
Address Book......................................................................................42
Log ......................................................................................................43
Preferences.........................................................................................44
Networking tab ....................................................................................................45
Configuration section...........................................................................46
Security section ..................................................................................46
Diagnostics section ............................................................................47
Network settings .................................................................................47
HP Toolbox ..........................................................................................................................47
HP Toolbox requirements....................................................................................47
Installing HP Toolbox...........................................................................................48
To view the HP Toolbox ......................................................................................48
The HP Toolbox Frame .......................................................................................48
Top banner...........................................................................................................48
Status tab.............................................................................................................49
Alerts tab..............................................................................................................50
Linking to the HP Embedded Web Server...........................................................51
Other Links...........................................................................................................51
HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................................52
HP Digital Sending Software ...............................................................................................54
Foreign Interface Harness....................................................................................................54
Remote firmware update .....................................................................................................54
Determining the current level of firmware ...........................................................55
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site........................................55
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser.................................56
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ............56
Windows operating systems................................................................56
Macintosh operating systems..............................................................57
iv
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port .....................................58
Windows 98 or Windows Me...............................................................58
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003 ........................................................................................59
Remote firmware update through a Windows network .......................................59
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems .......................................................60
Remote firmware update by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only) ..............................60
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x
only) .....................................................................................................................60
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command .......................................61
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .........................................61
Printer messages during the firmware update ....................................................62
Troubleshooting a firmware update ....................................................................63
Printing print-ready documents from a command line .........................................................64
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser....................................64
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection................65
Windows operating systems................................................................65
Macintosh operating systems..............................................................66
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port..............................................66
Windows 98 or Windows Me...............................................................67
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003 ........................................................................................67
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network ....................................................68
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems.............................................................68
Print-ready file printing by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)..................................68
File printing by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only) ........................69
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command ..........................................69
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems.....................................................70
Job stream output ...............................................................................................70
PJL/PJL Encoding................................................................................................71
Job tracking..........................................................................................................71
Connectivity .........................................................................................................71
Bidirectional communication ...............................................................................72
HP Driver Preconfiguration .................................................................................73
Bundle support.....................................................................................................73
Tray and paper assignment.................................................................................74
Installable options ...............................................................................................74
UI features ...........................................................................................................75
Help features .......................................................................................................75
Quick Sets............................................................................................................76
Paper Sizes..........................................................................................................76
Media Types ........................................................................................................76
Job storage ..........................................................................................................77
Print-quality and resolution..................................................................................78
Reordering Options .............................................................................................78
Resizing options...................................................................................................79
Watermarks .........................................................................................................79
Alternative source/paper type..............................................................................80
Printing destination...............................................................................................80
Finishing Options ................................................................................................80
v
Font support.........................................................................................................81
Postscript-specific features..................................................................................82
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction............................................................................................................................................83
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features ...................................................................................84
Access to print drivers...........................................................................................................84
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0..........................................................84
Document Defaults driver tabs............................................................84
Properties driver tabs..........................................................................85
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me....................................85
Help system..........................................................................................................................85
What's this? Help ................................................................................................86
Context-sensitive Help.........................................................................................86
Incompatible Options messages .........................................................................86
Bubble Help..........................................................................................................86
Finishing tab features ...........................................................................................................87
Print Task Quick Sets ..........................................................................................88
Default Print Settings ..........................................................................89
User Guide Print Settings ...................................................................91
Document Options...............................................................................................91
Print on Both Sides .............................................................................92
Automatically printing on both sides ..................................92
Flip Pages Up .....................................................................................92
Booklet Printing...................................................................................93
Book and Booklet Printing..................................................93
Printing a Booklet ..............................................94
Printing a Book ..................................................95
Pages per Sheet................................................95
Print Page Borders..............................................................................95
Page Order..........................................................................................95
Document preview image.....................................................................................96
Print Quality group box.........................................................................................96
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver....................96
Current Setting group box..................................................97
Font Settings group box.....................................................97
Output Settings group box..................................................97
Resolution:.........................................................97
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)..............................98
Print all Text as Black .......................................98
Edge-to-Edge Printing........................................98
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver....................98
Current Setting ...................................................................99
Graphic Settings.................................................................99
Output Settings ..................................................................99
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) .............................99
Print all Text as Black .......................................99
Edge-to-Edge Printing........................................99
Font Settings ...................................................100
Economode......................................................100
vi
Output tab features.............................................................................................................100
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................101
Document preview image...................................................................................102
Product image ...................................................................................................102
Output Bin Options.............................................................................................102
Effects tab features ............................................................................................................103
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................103
Fit To Page group box .......................................................................................104
Print Document On setting ...............................................................104
Scale to Fit option .............................................................................104
% of Normal Size option....................................................................105
Watermarks group box ......................................................................................105
Watermarks drop-down menu ..........................................................105
First Page Only check box................................................................106
Edit button (Watermark Details) .......................................................106
Current Watermarks ........................................................107
Watermark Message ........................................................107
Message Angle ................................................................107
Document preview image.................................................107
Font Attributes..................................................................107
Name................................................................108
Shading ...........................................................108
Size..................................................................108
Style.................................................................108
Default settings ...............................................108
Paper tab features..............................................................................................................109
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................109
Paper Options ...................................................................................................110
Size is ...............................................................................................110
Use Different Paper/Covers .............................................................111
Source Is ..........................................................................................111
Type is ..............................................................................................111
Custom..............................................................................................112
Name................................................................................113
Save, Delete, or Rename.................................................114
Custom size (width and height controls) .........................115
Custom width and height control limits.............................115
Paper and envelope icons...............................116
Dynamic measurement units ...........................................116
Close.................................................................................116
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................117
Front Cover ......................................................................117
First Page ........................................................................119
Other Pages......................................................................120
Last Page .........................................................................121
Back Cover.......................................................................122
Document preview image...................................................................................123
Product image....................................................................................................123
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................124
Job Storage tab .................................................................................................124
vii
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................125
Status group box ...............................................................................................126
Job Storage Mode .............................................................................................126
Off......................................................................................................126
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................126
Private Job ........................................................................................127
Using a PIN for Private Job .............................................127
Quick Copy .......................................................................................127
Stored Job ........................................................................................127
Job Notification options......................................................................................128
User Name .......................................................................................128
Job Name .........................................................................................128
PIN.....................................................................................................129
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................129
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................129
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................130
Basics tab features ............................................................................................................130
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................131
Copies ...............................................................................................................132
Orientation .........................................................................................................132
Document preview image...................................................................................132
About .................................................................................................................132
Properties tabs ...................................................................................................................134
NT Forms tab features ......................................................................................134
Configuring the trays.........................................................................135
Configure tab features .......................................................................................135
Paper Handling Options....................................................................136
Tray One Installed ...........................................................137
Mopier Enabled ................................................................137
Mopier mode and collation...............................137
Optional Paper Destinations ............................................138
Optional Paper Sources ..................................................138
Other Options ...................................................................................138
More configuration options...............................................138
Storage.............................................................139
Fonts................................................................139
Include types in application source list ...........141
Ignore Application Collation.............................141
Printer memory................................................141
Alternative Letterhead Mode............................141
Automatic configuration.....................................................................141
Product image ..................................................................................142
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features.........................................................................143
Access to Document Default print-driver settings in Windows NT 4.0...............................143
Access to Properties print-driver settings in Windows NT 4.0...........................................143
PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp .............................................144
Help system .......................................................................................................................144
What's this Help.................................................................................................144
Context-sensitive Help.......................................................................................144
Page Setup tab features ....................................................................................................144
viii
Advanced tab features........................................................................................................145
Paper/Output......................................................................................................146
Graphic...............................................................................................................147
Document Options.............................................................................................147
Page Layout Option...........................................................................................147
PostScript Options ............................................................................................148
Printer Features.................................................................................................149
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................151
Job Storage tab .................................................................................................152
Status group box ...............................................................................................153
Job Storage Mode..............................................................................................153
Off......................................................................................................153
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................153
Private Job ........................................................................................154
Using a PIN for Private Job..............................................154
Quick Copy .......................................................................................154
Stored Job ........................................................................................155
Job Identification ...............................................................................................155
User Name .......................................................................................155
Job Name .........................................................................................155
PIN.....................................................................................................156
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................156
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................156
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................157
Device Settings tab ............................................................................................................157
Form to Tray Assignment ..................................................................................159
Font Substitution Table......................................................................................160
PostScript Configurations...................................................................................160
Available PostScript Memory............................................................160
Output Protocol..................................................................................160
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job............................................................160
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ..............................................................161
Job Timeout ......................................................................................161
Wait Timeout ....................................................................................161
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline.....................................161
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ...................................161
Installable Options..............................................................................................161
Tray 1 ...............................................................................................162
Tray 4 ...............................................................................................162
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)......................................................162
Printer Hard Disk ..............................................................................162
Accessory Output Bin........................................................................162
Job Storage ......................................................................................162
Mopier Mode......................................................................................163
Printer Memory..................................................................................163
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Introduction..........................................................................................................................................165
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features..............................................................166
Access to print drivers........................................................................................................166
ix
Help system........................................................................................................................166
What's this? Help...............................................................................................166
Context-sensitive Help ......................................................................................167
Incompatible Print Settings messages...............................................................167
Advanced tab features........................................................................................................167
Paper/Output......................................................................................................168
Copy Count .......................................................................................169
Collated.............................................................................169
Graphic ..............................................................................................................169
True Type Font:.................................................................................169
Document Options.............................................................................................170
Advanced Printing Features..............................................................170
Print Optimizations ...........................................................................170
Printer Features ................................................................................170
Alternative Letterhead Mode............................................170
Edge-to-Edge....................................................................171
Print All Text as Black.......................................................171
Send TrueType as Bitmap ...............................................171
Layout Options .................................................................................171
Page Order.......................................................................171
Paper/Quality tab features..................................................................................................171
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................172
Default Print Settings.........................................................................173
User Guide Print Settings .................................................................175
Type new Quick Set name here .......................................................176
Paper Options....................................................................................................176
Size is................................................................................................177
Custom Paper Size...........................................................................178
Name................................................................................178
Paper size ........................................................................179
Units..................................................................................179
Custom width and height control limits.............................179
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................179
Source Is ..........................................................................................180
Type is...............................................................................................180
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................181
Front Cover ......................................................................181
First Page ........................................................................183
Other Pages .....................................................................184
Last Page .........................................................................185
Back Cover ......................................................................187
Document preview image...................................................................................188
Effects tab features.............................................................................................................188
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................189
Resizing options.................................................................................................190
Actual Size ........................................................................................190
Print Document On ...........................................................................190
Scale to Fit ........................................................................................190
% of Normal Size ..............................................................................191
Document preview image...................................................................................191
x
Watermarks........................................................................................................191
Current watermarks ..........................................................................193
Watermark Message ........................................................................193
Message Angle .................................................................................193
Font Attributes ..................................................................................193
Name................................................................................194
Color.................................................................................194
Shading ............................................................................194
Size...................................................................................194
Style..................................................................................194
Default settings ................................................................194
Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................194
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................195
Document Options ............................................................................................196
Print on Both Sides............................................................................196
Automatically printing on both sides ................................196
Flip Pages Up....................................................................................196
Booklet layout....................................................................................197
Book and Booklet Printing................................................197
Printing a Booklet ............................................198
Printing a Book ................................................198
Pages per Sheet................................................................................198
Print Page Borders ...........................................................................198
Page Order........................................................................................198
Document preview image...................................................................................199
Rotate.................................................................................................................199
Output tab features.............................................................................................................199
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................200
Document preview image...................................................................................201
Output Bin Options.............................................................................................201
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................201
Job Storage tab .................................................................................................202
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................204
Status group box ...............................................................................................204
Job Storage Mode .............................................................................................204
Off......................................................................................................204
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................204
Private Job.........................................................................................205
Using a PIN for Private Job .............................................205
Quick Copy........................................................................................205
Stored Job.........................................................................................206
Require PIN........................................................................................................206
Job notification ..................................................................................................206
User Name ........................................................................................................207
Job Name ..........................................................................................................207
If Job Name Exists.............................................................................................207
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................208
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................208
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................208
Properties tabs....................................................................................................................209
xi
Device Settings .................................................................................................209
Form to Tray Assignment..................................................................210
External Fonts...................................................................................211
Installing external fonts.....................................................212
Removing external fonts...................................................212
Font Substitution Table.....................................................................212
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings .........................213
Available PostScript Memory...........................213
Output Protocol................................................214
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job..........................214
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ............................214
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray ............214
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray......214
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript
Fonts................................................................214
Job Timeout ....................................................214
Wait Timeout ...................................................215
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline....215
Maximum Font Size to Download as
Outline .............................................................215
Installable Options............................................................215
Automatic Configuration...................................215
Tray 1 ..............................................................216
Tray 4 ..............................................................216
Accessory Output Bin......................................216
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ...................216
Printer Memory................................................216
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation
Unidriver only)..................................................217
Printer Hard Disk..............................................217
Job Storage......................................................217
Mopier Mode....................................................217
Mopier mode and collation..............217
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Introduction..........................................................................................................................................219
Supported Windows operating systems..............................................................................................220
System requirements...........................................................................................................................221
Font support ........................................................................................................................................222
Basic fonts .........................................................................................................................222
Default fonts .......................................................................................................................222
Installation instructions........................................................................................................................228
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................228
Installing from the printing-system CD...............................................................228
Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................228
Detailed Windows installation ............................................................................................229
Using the Back and Cancel buttons...................................................................229
Modifying a pre-existing installation...................................................................229
Typical Installation dialog box sequence ..........................................................229
Custom Installation.............................................................................................253
xii
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.......................................................254
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows.....................................................255
Running the Installer Customization Wizard.....................................255
Dialogs ..............................................................................................256
Distribution.........................................................................................271
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and
Server 2003........................................................................................................272
Setting a default printer.......................................................................................................273
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
Introduction..........................................................................................................................................275
System requirements ..........................................................................................................................276
Macintosh ...........................................................................................................................276
Linux....................................................................................................................................276
UNIX....................................................................................................................................276
Macintosh ...........................................................................................................................................277
Macintosh component descriptions ...................................................................................277
HP LaserJet PPDs.............................................................................................277
PDEs..................................................................................................................277
HP Toolbox ........................................................................................................277
HP Embedded Web Server................................................................................277
Install notes........................................................................................................278
Online help.........................................................................................................278
Screen fonts.......................................................................................................278
Font support .....................................................................................278
Installing the Macintosh printing system.............................................................................282
To install the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS .....282
To set up an AppleTalk networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x ............................282
To set up a Printer with Mac OS X.....................................................................283
To set up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x..................................283
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system........................................................................283
In-box disk layout ...............................................................................................................283
Mac OS Classic installation................................................................................................284
Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................284
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence ................................286
Mac OS X installation.........................................................................................................287
Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................287
7 Engineering Detail
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................293
Media attributes ..................................................................................................................................294
Media sources and destinations.........................................................................................294
Media-source commands...................................................................................................294
Media types and sizes........................................................................................................295
Driver features and attributes.............................................................................295
Custom paper sizes...........................................................................................297
Media-type commands ......................................................................................298
HP Toolbox .........................................................................................................................................299
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support.........................................................................299
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems.................................299
xiii
Index....................................................................................................................................................................301
xiv
1
Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the
printing-system software for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
NOTE Information relating to networking functions is specific to products that have network
capabilities.
This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer
Care Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information
systems (MIS) personnel, and HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp end users, as appropriate.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD.
This STR does not describe drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.
The following information is included in this technical reference:
■
Descriptions of drivers and platforms with system modifications
■
Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
■
Descriptions of various topics associated with the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, including
engineering details
NOTE An addendum to this STR includes system modification information and descriptions
of known software issues and workarounds.
The following table contains descriptions of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp models that are
described in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Introduction
1
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Feature
Model Specifications
Functions
■
Two-sided printing and copying
■
Image modification
■
Color digital sending
■
Wide-format printing
■
Document finishing
■
50 pages per minute (ppm) when scanning and printing on letter-size or
International Standards Organization (ISO) A4–size paper (HP LaserJet
9050mfp only)
■
40 ppm when scanning and printing on letter-size or ISO A4–size paper
(HP LaserJet 9040mfp only)
■
25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass
■
25% to 200% scalability when using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
■
Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology
■
Eight-second standby to first page
■
Duty cycle of up to 300,000 pages per month
■
533 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor
■
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats
■
Job Interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)
■
Multiple pages per sheet
■
Operator attendance animations (for example, paper-jam recovery)
■
Able to copy books
■
E-mail compatible
■
One-pass duplex scanning
■
256 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to
512 MB by using industry standard 100-pin double data rate dual inline
memory modules (DDR DIMMs)
■
Memory Enhancement technology (MET) that automatically compresses
data to use RAM more efficiently
■
Two compact flash slots for job storage
■
Optional EIO Hard disk drive.
Performance
Copying and Sending
Memory
2
1
Purpose and scope
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp (continued)
Feature
Model Specifications
User interface
■
The control panel includes a touch-screen graphical display, job-control
buttons, a numeric keypad, and three light-emitting diode (LED) indicator
lights.
■
Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies (networkconnected printers).
■
HP Toolbox software to provide product status and alerts, view
documentation and troubleshooting information, and print internal product
information pages.
■
PCL 6
■
PCL 5
■
PCL XL
■
XHTML
■
PDF
■
MIME
■
Printer Management Language
■
Postscript
■
Job storage
■
Personal identification number (PIN) printing
■
Fonts and forms
■
The Sleep setting saves energy.
■
Draft mode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the
print cartridge.
■
High content of recyclable components and materials.
■
Automatic duplex feature and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one
page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on
natural resources.
■
Energy Star® compliant.
■
66 default TrueType fonts installed with typical installation.
■
92 additional postscript fonts available on the installation CD.
■
Includes HP Web Jetadmin to support forms and fonts on the disk.
Supported printer personalities
Storage features
Environmental features
Fonts
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
3
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp (continued)
Feature
Model Specifications
Paper Handling
■
Prints on media from 98 by 190.5 mm (3.86 by 7.5 inches) up to 312 by
470 mm (12.28 by 18.5 inches) in size.
NOTE Maximum for product with 8–bin mailbox is 306 by 470
mm (12.05 by 18.5 inches).
■
Prints on media with weights from 64 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (17 lb to 58 lb bond).
Two-sided printing: 64 to 199 g/m2(17 lb to 53 lb bond)
Accessories
Connectivity
4
■
Prints on a wide range of media types including labels, transparencies,
heavy paper, and envelopes.
■
Automatic document feeder (ADF) that can hold up to 100 sheets of letter,
legal, executive, ISO A3, ASO A4, 11 x 17, JIS B4, and JIS B5 media
■
100-sheet multipurpose tray (Tray 1)
■
Two 500-sheet trays (Tray 2 and Tray 3)
■
2000-sheet tray (Tray 4)
■
Automatic duplexing unit
■
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp includes one of the following finishing
devices:
■
3000–sheet stacker stacks up to 3000 sheets of paper in the order in
which they were printed.
■
3000–sheet stacker/stapler provides multiposition stapling for up to 50
sheets of paper per job, or equivalent job height of 5 mm (depending
on paper thickness).
■
Multifunction finisher provides 1000 sheets of stacking capacity,
stapling for as many as 50 sheets of paper per document, plus folding
and saddle stitching of booklets that contain up to 10 sheets of paper.
■
8–bin mailbox functions as a stacker, collator, or job separator, and
increases the product's output capacity to 2000 sheets of standard
media. Each of 8 bins holds up to 250 sheets of media.
■
Flash Memory cards
■
Additional EIO cards, including USB and IEEE 1394 EIO
■
HP Digital Sending software
■
Analog fax card
■
Parallel B connection
■
Foreign interface harness (FIH) connection (AUX)
■
Local area network (LAN)-connector (RJ-45) for the embedded print server
■
Optional analog fax card
■
Optional HP Digital Sending Software
1
Purpose and scope
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp (continued)
Feature
Model Specifications
■
Supplies
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Optional HP Jetdirect EIO print server cards
■
Universal serial bus (USB), serial, and LocalTalk
■
Fast Ethernet 10/100TX
■
Wireless 802.11b
■
Supplies status view in HP Toolbox and embedded Web server contains
information on toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.
■
Web Jetadmin provides instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low
supplies, and other MFP status
■
A supplies status page (which can be printed by using the control panel)
shows the toner gauge, page count, and information about paper sizes
that have been used.
■
No-shake cartridge design and no-pull tab with automatic seal-tab removal.
■
Product checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation.
■
Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities (by using the embedded
Web server or the HP Toolbox software).
5
Printing-system software CD
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
Software features
●
HP LaserJet documentation
Software features
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
Printing system and installer
●
HP LaserJet print drivers
●
Driver Autoconfiguration
●
Update Now
●
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Printing system and installer
The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the
software CD that came with the product.
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD for Windows systems
For the Microsoft® Windows® environment (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printingsystem software CD provides an interactive software window that you can use not only to install the
print drivers and related components, but also to gain access to online user documentation, a
customization utility, Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® software, and optional HP software.
The following illustration shows the main screen of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system
software CD, which appears when you insert the printing-system software CD in your CD-ROM drive.
If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD, click Start, click Run, click
Browse..., navigate to the root directory of the software CD, and then double-click the SETUP.EXE
file to start the installer.
6
1
Purpose and scope
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD main screen
The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and
documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move your cursor over each option, a
description of the option appears above the product image.
NOTE
The options on your product might vary from the illustration.
install printer. This wizard guides you through the installation of your HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
printing-system software. You are given the choice of performing a Typical Installation or a Custom
Installation. If you select Typical Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select
Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install.
installer customization wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
installer by presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that you have
customized can then be used for silent, unattended installation.
NOTE For the HP Traditional PCL 5 drivers and all Windows NT 4.0 drivers, use HP Web
Jetadmin or the HP Driver Preconfiguration utility to create a silent installer.
Printing-system software CD
7
register product. Use this option to register your product online. Using the Web registration, you
can gain access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts,
driver notices, and personalized newsletters.
printer documentation. Use this option to view the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp user documentation.
The following document options are available when you click this option:
■
user guide (interactive)
■
user guide (printer friendly)
■
install notes
■
hp driver preconfiguration user guide
■
embedded web server guide
■
hp jetdirect guide
NOTE If your system does not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking
any of the links to documentation that is provided in the portable document format (PDF) file
format opens a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader software that runs from the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD. The CD Browser version of Acrobat
Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The
Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on your computer and can only run while the
printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available
at the following URL: http://www.adobe.com.
support. To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, view
a list of optional software programs that are available for installation and links to HP Web sites. The
following options are available:
■
Click hp web jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web
browser-based network-management tool.
■
Click supplies for information about ordering HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supplies.
■
Click product information for HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp support information and updates.
■
Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services,
support, drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the
product. The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
8
1
Purpose and scope
The common installer offers the following features:
■
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD features an interactive software
interface. See HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD for Windows systems.
■
Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked
product in a single process.
■
The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You
can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printingsystem software CD.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD also includes the following features:
■
The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
■
The HP Customization Utility for custom installations
■
The HP Toolbox
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp series
printing-system installer. The installer automatically detects your language of choice and your
operating system. You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Typical Installation or
Custom Installation.
HP LaserJet print drivers
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp print drivers provide the printing features and communication between
the computer and the product. The printing system includes software for end users and network
administrators who are working in the following operating environments:
■
Microsoft® Windows® 98 and Windows Millenium Edition (Me)
■
Microsoft Windows NT® 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Apple Mac OS 9.x and later, and Mac OS X (Version 10.1 and later)
Automatic configuration, driver updates after a new configuration, and preconfiguration features are
available with the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, view the
readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system
software, view the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp Printing System Install Notes on the printingsystem software CD.
All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described
in chapters 3 and 4 of this guide.
HP PCL 5, PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers
The following drivers are available on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD:
■
The PCL 5 for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
■
The PCL 6 for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
Printing-system software CD
9
■
The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and
Windows NT 4.0.
■
The HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
NOTE If you select a Typical Installation during installation of the printing-system software,
the HP PCL 6 driver is installed by default. You must use the Add Printer wizard to install any
of the PCL 5 drivers. It is also necessary to use the Add Printer wizard to install any driver in
Windows NT 4.0.
Table 1-2 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Operating System1
PCL 6
PCL 5
PS emulation
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
Windows 2000
X
X
X
Windows XP
X
X
X
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
Macintosh OS
1
X
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for
information about the features that are available.
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp PCL 6 and PCL 5 print drivers supportWindows 98, Windows Me,
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. The
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp PS emulation driver software provides postscript feature support for the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
If you are using an HP traditional PCL driver, you can view the print driver version number by clicking
the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP traditional PCL 6 or HP traditional PCL 5
driver tabs:
■
Finishing
■
Effects
■
Paper
■
Job Storage
■
Basics
If you are using an HP unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
environments, follow these steps to find driver-version information:
10
1
Click Start.
2
Click Settings.
1
Purpose and scope
3
Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows
2000).
4
Right-click the printer icon.
5
Click Properties.
6
Click the About tab.
NOTE For a list of print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and product support
information, go to .http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp_software.
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible printing system
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp series printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center
for OS X and the Apple LaserWriter driver for OS 9, which are provided with the operating system,
and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and postscript
commands that the product supports. Bidirectional support in AppleTalk connections supports
autoconfiguration of the software. The following are installable components:
■
The HP Color LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9, and Mac OS X
■
The HP Color LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer
■
SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS 9)
■
LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X)
■
Online Help, an HTML-based printer and utility help that can be viewed through a browser or in
the Macintosh OS Help Center (in English only)
■
Install notes
NOTE The HP LaserJet Utility is a standalone utility that is not installed by the installer, but
is available on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD. It is an HP utility
that is installed in the HP LaserJet folder of Mac OS 9 and provides configuration and
management support for postscript. It can be found on the CD in a directory called “hp OS 9
LaserJet Utility.”
Additional driver availability
All drivers on the printing-system CD are also available on the Web. The following drivers are
available only on the Web site:
■
HP OpenVMS drivers. For further information, go to h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/
■
HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/
inpw_software
■
OS/2 PCL 5/PCL 6 print driver
■
OS/2 PS print driver
■
UNIX® model scripts. For further information about UNIX model scripts, go to www.hp.com/go/
unixmodelscripts.
Printing-system software CD
11
■
Tru64 UNIX printing. For further information, go to http://h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
■
Linux drivers. For further information, go to http://www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
■
SAP printing. For further information, go to http://www.hp.com/go/sap/print
NOTE The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers for Windows features automatic discovery and driver
configuration for product accessories at the time of installation. Some supported accessories are the
duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp since installation, the driver
can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the
driver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT
4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, or Windows XP hosts.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP software to be
customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise
environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing
the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide, which is available at http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software. or
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp_software.
Information about HP Driver Preconfiguration is also available on the following Web site: www.hp.com/
go/hpdpc_sw
HP LaserJet documentation
This section describes the documentation that is available to users and administrators.
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system documentation
by operating system.
Table 1-3 Documentation availability
12
Document
Windows 98
/Me
Windows NT
4.0
Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003
Macintosh
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp Printing System Install Notes
x
x
x
1
Purpose and scope
Table 1-3 Documentation availability (continued)
Document
Windows 98
/Me
Windows NT
4.0
Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003
Macintosh
HP Embedded Web Server Guide
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location. Some
documents can be opened from the installer CD Browser. Others appear on the software CD and
can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside. Still others are available on the Web
through links in the installer CD Browser or CD folders. Documents are available in the following file
formats:
■
Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software
CD includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation. If your system does not
have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any of the links to documentation that
is provided in the .PDF file format opens a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader software that runs
from the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD. The Adobe Acrobat Reader
software is not installed on your computer and can only run while the printing-system software
CD is in the CD-ROM drive.
■
Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft
HTML Viewer opens the file on your computer screen. The .CHM files can reside either on the
printing-system software CD or on the Web.
■
Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web
browser opens the file on your computer screen. The .HTM files can reside either on the printingsystem software CD or on the Web.
■
Rich Text format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to .RTF files and open them in
Microsoft Word or Microsoft WordPad.
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide describes the basic features of the product.
To view this guide, click printer documentation in the installer CD Browser, and then click view
user guide. The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, on–screen version
of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
The screen-readable version (.CHM) of the User Guide for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is also
available on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD. To open the guide from
the software CD, navigate to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the Manuals
folder. In that folder, open the file that has the appropriate file name:
■
LJ9050MFP_USE_XXWW.CHM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the guide is LJ9050MFP_USE_FRWW.CHM
Printing-system software CD
13
To print the User Guide, click printer documentation on the installer CD Browser, and then click
print user guide. The guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print.
This document is also available on the software CD. To open the .PDF version of the guide, navigate
to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the Manuals folder. In that folder, open
the file that has the appropriate file name:
■
LJ9050MFP_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the guide is LJ9050MFP_USE_FRWW.PDF
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp Printing System Install Notes
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp Printing System Install Notes is a document (in .HTM format) that
contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system
software, and technical assistance.
To view this file from the software CD, click printer documentation on the main screen of the
installer CD Browser, and then click install notes.
You can also open the file by inserting the software CD into the CD-ROM drive and navigating to
<language>. In that folder, open the file that has the appropriate file name:
■
LJ9050MFP_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the document is LJ9050MFP_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM.
When you have the file open in a text editor (such as NotePad or WordPad), you can click File and
then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Embedded Web Server Guide
The HP Embedded Web Server Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status,
settings, and networking for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and
then click embedded web server guide.
You can also gain access to the HP Embedded Web Server Guide by inserting the software CD into
the CD-ROM drive, navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the
Manuals folder. In that folder, open the file that has the appropriate file name:
■
EWS8_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. In French, the file name is
EWS8_USE_FRWW.HTM.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
14
1
Purpose and scope
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is a guide (in .PDF format) for preconfiguring drivers
in network environments.
To view this guide, insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive, navigate to english, and then
open the Manuals. In that folder, open the file that has the appropriate name:
■
PRECONFIG_SUPPORT_ENWW.PDF
NOTE The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is available only in English on the
software CD.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that
contains information about connecting the product directly to a network.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and
then click hp jetdirect guide.
You can also gain access to the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide by inserting the software CD into
the CD-ROM drive, navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the
Manuals folder. In that folder, click the appropriate file name to gain access to the guide:
■
HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. In French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard (in .HTM format) provides network administrators with
information about options and installation settings that can be selected for the Installer Customization
Wizard.
You can gain access to the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard by inserting the software CD
into the CD-ROM drive and navigating to the <language> folder for your language. In that folder,
open the file that has the appropriate file name:
■
CUSTOMIZATION_README_XXWW.RTF
NOTE The file name is the same for all languages. The document itself has been localized.
To open the French version of the document, for instance, navigate to the francais folder.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
Printing-system software CD
15
Structure and availability of the software CD
The software CD for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp contains a variety of files for installing the
printing-system software on your computer. This section describes the files that are available on the
software CD, as well as additional support and fulfillment information.
In-box file layout
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software consists of two partitions: one for installing
the product in Windows operating systems, and the other for Macintosh operating systems. The files
include documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printing-system
components.
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file,
SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:
■
autorun
■
Fonts
■
HW
■
System32
■
Temp
■
toolbox
■
WebReg
■
Language directories for all the languages that are on the software CD
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
■
Drivers
■
Manuals
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
To view the files, insert the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD, right-click
Start, click Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by
language and reside in the following directories:
■
Root directory
■
HP LASERJET INSTALLERS (for Macintosh operating systems)
■
PDF (for guides and manuals)
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
16
1
Purpose and scope
Availability and fulfillment
This section provides information about the availability of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printingsystem software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available
from HP fulfillment centers.
In-box CDs
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD is available in five versions.
■
■
■
■
CD AM - Americas and Europe:
■
DE = German (Deutsch)
■
EN = English
■
ES = Spanish (Español)
■
FR = French (Français)
■
IT = Italian (Italiano)
■
NL = Dutch (Nederland)
■
PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
CD WE- Western Europe and Arabic:
■
AR = Arabic
■
DN = Danish (Dansk)
■
EN = English
■
FR = French (Français)
CD NE- Northern Europe and Russian:
■
EN = English
■
FI = Finnish (Suomi)
■
NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
■
RU = Russian (Russ)
■
SV = Swedish (Svenska)
■
TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
CD EE - Eastern Europe:
■
CZ = Czech (Cesky)
■
EL = Greek
■
EN = English
■
HE = Hebrew
Structure and availability of the software CD
17
■
■
HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
■
PL = Polish (Polski)
CD AS - Asia:
■
EN = English
■
JA = Japanese
■
KO = Korean
■
TH = Thai
■
ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
■
ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
The following tables list the five versions of the software CD, along with the components that are
supported in each language.
NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/
regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs.
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe
Component
DE
EN
ES
FR
IT
NL
PT
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Preconfiguration
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (CHM)
18
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Printing System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
Purpose and scope
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe (continued)
Component
DE
EN
ES
FR
IT
NL
PT
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe and Arabic
Component
AR
DN
EN
FR
HP PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide
(PDF)
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide
(CHM)
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp Printing System
Install Notes
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
x
x
x
Structure and availability of the software CD
19
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe and Russian
Component
EN
FI
NO
RU
SV
TR
HP PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (CHM)
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Printing System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
x
x
x
Table 1-7 D EE – Eastern Europe
20
Component
CZ
EL
EN
HE
HU
PL
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
Purpose and scope
Table 1-7 D EE – Eastern Europe (continued)
Component
CZ
EL
EN
HE
HU
PL
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (CHM)
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Printing System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
x
Table 1-8 CD AS - Asia
Component
EN
JA
KO
TH
ZHCN
ZHTW
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
User Guide (CHM)
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
Structure and availability of the software CD
x
x
x
x
x
x
21
Table 1-8 CD AS - Asia (continued)
Component
EN
JA
KO
TH
ZHCN
ZHTW
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Printing System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
Web deployment
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers a
notification option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
Printing-system software
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software is available for download from
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp_software.
NOTE Only 32-bit printer drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If your
computer is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit printer driver. 64-bit
printer drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available on the Web at
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/
lj9050mfp_software.
For more information about installing printer drivers for Windows, see Installing Windows
printing-system components.
The printing-system software supports the following operating systems:
■
Windows 98 and Windows Me
■
Windows NT 4.0
■
Windows XP Professional (32-bit)
■
Windows XP Home Edition
■
Windows 2000 (32-bit)
■
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit)
Standalone drivers
The HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation drivers and unidrivers are available individually to
support the following operating systems:
22
■
Windows 98 and Windows Me
■
Windows NT 4.0
■
Windows 2000
1
Purpose and scope
■
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Mac OS 9.x
■
Mac OS X (version 10.1 or later)
Other operating systems
Drivers and related software are available for these additional operating environments:
■
UNIX
■
Linux
■
OS/2
■
HP Open VMS
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
NOTE In the following table, "98/Me" refers to Windows 98 and Windows Me; "2K" refers to
Windows 2000; "4.0" refers to Windows NT 4.0; "XP" refers to Windows XP; “XP 64” refers to
Windows XP for 64-bit drivers.
Table 1-9 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Component
98/Me
4.0
2K/XP1
XP 64
x
x
HP PCL 5 and PCL 6 unidrivers
x
x
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
Drivers
HP traditional PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
HP Preconfiguration
x
x
Installer
1
Common Windows Installer
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard install
x
x
x
Web Registration
x
x
x
x
This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Structure and availability of the software CD
23
24
1
Purpose and scope
2
Software description
Introduction
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is
available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see
the section that corresponds to that system.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
Introduction
●
Supported operating systems
●
Technology background information
25
Supported operating systems
The support for Windows operating systems (OSs) offers a full-featured configuration of the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp. Support for OSs that are not described in this document offer varying
levels of functionality. The following OSs are supported by the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printingsystem software, including PCL 5, PCL 6, and PS Emulation Drivers:
■
Windows 98
■
Windows Me
■
Windows NT 4.0 (Service packs 3 through 6)
■
Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
■
Windows XP Home Edition
■
Windows XP Professional (Service pack 1 and greater)
■
Windows Server 2003
NOTE Throughout this manual, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition,
Windows XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp also supports the following operating environments:
■
Mac OS 9.x and Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
■
Linux (available at http://www.hp.com/go/linux)
■
UNIX (available at http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software)
■
Windows Terminal Server
■
Citrix Terminal Server
■
Windows Cluster Server 8
■
HP OpenVMS (available at http://h71000.www7.hp.com/)
For more information about the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, go to: http://www.hp.com/go/
lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/go/lj9050mfp_software
26
2
Software description
Technology background information
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
Driver Configuration
●
HP Driver Preconfiguration
●
Euro character
●
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Toolbox
●
HP Embedded Web Server
●
HP Toolbox
●
HP Web Jetadmin
●
HP Digital Sending Software
●
Foreign Interface Harness
●
Remote firmware update
●
Printing print-ready documents from a command line
●
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
Driver Configuration
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp print drivers feature bidirectional communication technology which,
in supported environments, provides automatic discovery and driver configuration for product
accessories. Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the
duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the
following circumstances:
■
Upon installation of a printer driver, when using Enterprise Autoconfiguration (EAC)
■
When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the
product during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver
accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the
computer and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what
accessories are connected to the product. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it
has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information
back to the host computer.
Bidirectional communication depends on your network operating system and on the type of
connection you have between your computer and the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
Technology background information
27
When you install the HP Toolbox, bidirectional communication is always enabled. Installing the
HP Toolbox activates the HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) to ensure constant communication
between your computer and the product. When you install a driver without installing the HP Toolbox
at the same time, bidirectional communication is enabled only to configure the driver, and is then
disabled unless the driver's Update Now feature is used to update the driver.
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration
functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on your
printing-system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that
includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product.
Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional-communication software has been
installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the pre-existing bidirectional-communication software
is used to configure the print driver.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectionalcommunication software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the
print driver with the actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or
whenever the Update Now feature is used.
If the configuration of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp changes after installation, the driver can be
automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication by using the Update Now feature. For example, if the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is
installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, you can use the Update Now
feature to query the product and update the settings to match the product's configuration.
The Update Now feature triggers the driver to recheck the registry for new information. The feature
automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the
Configure tab if you are using an HP Traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, and on the Device Settings
tab if you are using an HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, or PS Emulation Unidriver.
NOTE If you are using an HP PCL or PS unidriver, you must select Update Now through the
Automatic Configuration setting in Device Settings tab. If you are using an HP traditional
PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, you must click the Update Now button on the Configure tab. The
Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional PS Emulation Driver.
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network
environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-1 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method
Installer
28
Connection type
Direct
connect
Parallel
Network
Jetdirect
Microsoft Windows
Microsoft Share1
98
Me
NT 4.0
2000
XP
2000/XP
host
with
2000/XP
client
NT 4.0
host
with NT
4.0 client
TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
IPX/SPX
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
USB
2
Software description
Table 2-1 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share (continued)
Method
Connection type
Microsoft Windows
Standard
Add
Printer
Direct
connect
Parallel
Network
Jetdirect
Microsoft Share1
98
Me
NT 4.0
2000
XP
2000/XP
host
with
2000/XP
client
NT 4.0
host
with NT
4.0 client
TCP/IP
(HP)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
TCP/IP
(MS)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
IPX/SPX
(HP)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
IPX/SPX
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
TCP/IP
(HP)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
x
x
x
x2
x
x
x
x2
USB
Standard
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP)
1
2
x
x
x
This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Server
host with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 3. Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client.
In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
Table 2-2 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method
Connection type
Novell
Netware 5.x
Netware 4.x
Installer
Direct connect
Bindery
queue
NDS queue
Bindery
queue
NT 4.0
x
x
x
x
Parallel
USB
Network
Jetdirect
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Standard
TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP (MS1)
IPX/SPX (HP)
1
Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for
NetWare.
Technology background information
29
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system
software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP
Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise
environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing
the drivers in the network environment.
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations
or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be
configured: device settings and printing-preferences settings. The driver is configured to match the
product hardware so that gaining access to all of the product accessories through the driver is
enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature
settings can also be configured.
HP Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories installed on the product, or to
match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example, optional
trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: driver acquisition, driver preconfiguration,
and driver installation and deployment. These steps can be accomplished in different ways,
depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All
three are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the
configuration (.CFG) file, but are packaged differently, either to support established product
installation workflows or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user.
The following tools support driver preconfiguration:
■
HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone
Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is
associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is
installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established
process for deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or
HP Print Server Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any
ordinary Windows software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/
hpdpc_sw.
■
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin
Driver Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow
from which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the
process. The plug-in is limited to Internet Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site:
http://www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html.
■
HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time
mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the
drivers for a printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.
Detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools can be found in the HP Driver
Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available on the printing-system software CD.
30
2
Software description
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
■
Print on Both Sides (Duplex)
■
Media Type
■
Paper Source
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been installed.
Euro character
The euro is the name for the currency of the European Union (EU). This unit was launched on
January 1, 1999. The euro has changed the way business is conducted in Europe and has affected
every company and industry in the world. It is vital that companies understand and prepare for the
changes the euro brings.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp includes euro characters for each of the internal fonts. The product
can print the euro character in the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Hewlett-Packard is committed to
maximizing document portability through supporting and promoting euro-symbol standards.
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Toolbox
HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) and HP Toolbox are both tools that can be used to remotely
configure printers on a network. Both HP EWS and HP Toolbox are used with a Web browser and
they have a similar look and feel. Many of the pages in HP EWS are nearly identical to HP Toolbox
pages. However, there are several key differences between the two utilities:
■
HP Toolbox is used to manage the printers that are installed on the client machine where
Toolbox is installed. Toolbox gets the address of the printers from the registry entry of the port
that the printer is using.
■
HP Toolbox can also be used to manage locally connected printers.
■
To access HP EWS, the user just needs to know the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) address of the printer. No software needs to be installed on the user's
computer.
■
For most products, HP EWS can only be directly accessed when both printer and computer are
equipped with network cards (or some form of network connection). In these cases, the Web
browser gains access to the product directly through its TCP/IP address. The only Web pages
available are those that are served from the printer.
■
HP Toolbox supports network and direct connect forms of printer connectivity. The browser
directs itself to a locally hosted TCP/IP service that monitors the printing port (be it network or
direct connect). HP Toolbox Web pages are generated through a combination of locally installed
Web content and data that is retrieved from the printer. These Web pages also facilitate printer
control. On some products, HP Toolbox provides a link to the printer's HP EWS page, but these
are not accessed directly through the browser, but rather through the locally hosted TCP/IP
service.
■
HP Toolbox provides the Select Device page, which is used to choose which of the locally
installed devices to manage (if more than one has been installed).
Technology background information
31
The HP EWS and HP Toolbox utilities are described in detain in the following sections.
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP EWS is a standard feature for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one product management. In offices
that have a limited number of products, remote management of printing devices can be
accomplished without installing any management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin. The only
requirement is that the management console have a supported Web browser.
In environments with a larger number of products, where one-to-one management is impractical, the
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote product
management. Use HP Web Jetadmin for consolidated management tasks, when you want to perform
operations on a selected set of products instead of on individual products. For such environments,
HP provides hooks between the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin so that you can
configure HP Embedded Web Server features on multiple products in one operation. For example,
you can set the security password for the HP Embedded Web Server simultaneously on a cluster of
products.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp_software.
To view information about the product by using the HP Embedded Web Server, open a supported
Web browser and type in the product TCP/IP address or host name. To find the TCP/IP address,
look for IP Address on the enhanced input/output (EIO) Jetdirect page, in the TCP/IP section. To
find the host name of the product, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section.
You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking
tab in the HP Embedded Web Server window.
To print a copy of the EIO Jetdirect page from the control-panel display, follow these steps:
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4
Press the SELECT button to print the configuration page.
The HP EWS frame
Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, four category tabs, a leftaligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes
the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes
links to content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens
options in response to navigation tab selections and menu bar selections.
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
32
■
Information tab
■
Settings tab
■
Digital Sending tab
2
Software description
■
Networking tab
Information tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. To view the information, click
the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab.
NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only tab that is
visible until the user logs in. See Security for more information.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP EWS
User Guide.
■
Device Status screen. This screen provides current status information about the product.
■
Configuration Page. This screen provides information about the configuration of the product.
■
Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages
that have been printed, and the serial number of the product.
■
Event log. This screen provides information about reported printer errors.
■
Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through
the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages.
■
Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the product TCP/IP address
and serial number.
■
Control Panel. This screen shows the product control panel.
■
Print. You can use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated
by a "print to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files.
Links to off-product solutions
Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
■
hp instant support. This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you
solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your device.
Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the
"Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help
resolve problems as quickly as possible.
■
Order Supplies. This link connects you to an HP product supplies screen from which you can
order genuine HP supplies for your product.
■
Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which you can
search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for
your product.
Device Status screen
Status information, such as whether the product is online or the toner is low, is available through your
Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the product. You can view this information
Technology background information
33
without physically going to the product to identify the status. The following illustration shows how this
information is presented on the product Web page.
Figure 2-1 Device Status screen on the Information tab
Configuration Page
You can gain access to the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp configuration page remotely through the
HP EWSr. The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the
product in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the product. The following
illustration shows an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS.
34
2
Software description
Figure 2-2 Configuration Page screen on the Information tab
NOTE This illustration is provided as an example only.
Technology background information
35
Settings tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. To view the information, click the
menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab. The Settings tab is shown in the Configure
device section.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP EWS
User Guide.
■
Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print product information pages and
configure the product remotely.
■
E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail.
■
Alerts. IT administrators can set up the product to send alerts to anyone through e-mail
messages.
■
AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies-usage
information periodically to your service provider.
■
Security. Use the Security screen to manage security on the product.
■
Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the
Web sites of your choice.
■
Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the
product, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about
the product, and the physical location of the product.
■
Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens
appear.
■
Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the product.
■
Wake Time Wake Time can be set to wake the product up at a certain time on a daily basis.
There can only be one wake time setting per day; however, each day can have a different wake
time. The sleep mode delay can also be set on this page.
Configure device
You can obtain product configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS
screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password
controls give management information system managers the level of control that they require within
their network environments. The following illustration shows an example of product options that can
be configured remotely.
36
2
Software description
Figure 2-3 Configure Device screen on the Settings tab
Alerts
The product can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified email addresses. For example, if toner is low, the product can notify the person who is responsible for
ordering or changing the toner bottle. If a product failure occurs, the product can send an e-mail alert
directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured
to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital
assistants (PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or
uniform resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification.
Technology background information
37
Figure 2-4 Alerts – setup screen on the Settings tab
NOTE This illustration is provided as an example only.
38
2
Software description
Security
The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to how you gain access
to the HP EWS: as a general user, an information technology (IT) administrator, or a service
provider. To control access to the HP EWS screens, a password can be set on the Security page.
Figure 2-5 Security screen on the Settings tab
In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by
using the password. If no password has been set (which is the default), all of the tabs are visible.
If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain
access to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings, Digital Sending, and Networking).
Digital Sending tab
The following options are available on the HP EWS Digital Sending tab.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP EWS
User Guide.
Use the menu on the left side of the screen to control the digital–sending features offered by the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp:
General
Use the General Settings screen to set digital–sending administrator information. For more
information, see the HP EWS User Guide.
Technology background information
39
Figure 2-6 General section on the Digital Sending tab
Send to E-mail
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp requires a Simple Mail Protocol Transfer (SMTP) Gateway server to
forward e–mail messages to destination e–mail addresses. Use the E–mail Settings screen to
configure SMTP settings, set the maximum e–mail attachment size, and set the default e–mail
address for the product. You can also set a default subject for all e–mail messages that the product
sends.
For more information, see the HP EWS User Guide.
40
2
Software description
Figure 2-7 E–mail Settings screen on the Digital Sending tab
Addressing
To send scanned documents with the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, you must provide e–mail
addresses. The product addressing feature simplifies this process by searching for destination e–
mail addresses.
Use the Addressing Settings screen to set features that allow the product to get e–mail addresses
directly from the database of a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server instead of from
a replicated LDAP Address Book. Using the LDAP Address Book directly guarantees that the latest
addresses are used.
For more information, see the HP EWS User Guide.
Technology background information
41
Figure 2-8 Addressing Settings screen on the Digital Sending tab.
Address Book
Use the Address Book screen to add a predefined list of e–mail addresses, in the form of a CommaSeparated Value (.CSV) file, to be imported into the product internal address book. The .CSV file is a
plain–text file (in UTF-8 encoding) that contains each e–mail address entry on a separate line. An
entry consists of an alias, which is the name that appears, followed by a comma and an e–mail
address. The aliases and e–mail addresses cannot contain any commas. For example:
■
name1, name1@your.company.com
■
name2, name2@your.company.com
On the product control panel, use the alias name to search for e–mail addresses. For more
information, see the HP EWS User Guide.
42
2
Software description
Figure 2-9 Address Book screen on the Digital Sending tab
Log
Use the Activity Log screen to view digital sending job information, including any errors that occur.
For more information, see the HP EWS User Guide.
Technology background information
43
Figure 2-10 Activity Log screen on the Digital Sending tab
Preferences
Use the Preferences Settings screen to configure general settings for the digital–sending features.
For more information, see the HP EWS User Guide.
44
2
Software description
Figure 2-11 Preferences Settings screen on the Digital Sending tab
Networking tab
The following options are available on the HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP EWS
User Guide.
Technology background information
45
Figure 2-12 Configuration section on the Networking tab
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories:
configuration, security, and diagnostics. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide.
Configuration section
■
Network Settings
■
Other Settings
■
Privacy Settings
■
Select Language
Security section
46
■
Settings
■
Authorization
■
Mgmt. Protocols
2
Software description
Diagnostics section
■
Network Statistics
■
Protocol Info
■
Configuration Page
Network settings
From the Networking tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols:
■
TCP/IP
■
Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
■
AppleTalk
■
Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
■
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a series of Web pages and supporting software tools that provide access to the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp EWS and other firmware functions, making them available on a browserdriven user interface where product properties can be viewed and manipulated.
The HP Toolbox provides links to product status information, help information, and tools for
diagnosing and solving problems. The HP Toolbox also provides product status and settings
information from the HP EWS, by clicking the Device Settings button in the upper-right corner of
each of the two main HP Toolbox screens.
HP Toolbox requirements
HP Toolbox requires one of these recent Internet browsers in order to show HP EWS pages:
■
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Internet Explorer 5.1 or later for Macintosh)
■
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later (Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later for Macintosh)
■
Opera Software ASA Opera 7.0 for Windows
■
Safari 1.0 software for Macintosh
These browser requirements are not necessarily minimum standards, but they are the minimum
tested environments. Other, untested browsers might also provide access to the HP Toolbox screens.
The HP Toolbox is supported only for Windows 98 and later operating systems (Windows Me,
Windows 2000, and 32-bit Windows XP). You must have performed a complete software installation
in order to use the HP Toolbox for the current product.
When the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is connected both through a network using an HP Jetdirect
card and through a local parallel connection, the network connection takes precedence. On a
network connection, bidirectional communication is supported through a TCP/IP connection.
Technology background information
47
Installing HP Toolbox
To install the HP Toolbox, perform a custom installation and select hp LaserJet toolbox from the
Setup dialog.
NOTE It is necessary to install HP Toolbox for each product, even when the HP Toolbox is
currently in use for other products.
To view the HP Toolbox
To open the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp Toolbox, on the Start menu, point to Programs, point to
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, and then click hp LaserJet toolbox.
The HP Toolbox opens in your Web browser. The HP Toolbox software contains two tabs:
■
the Status tab
■
the Alerts tab
These tabs are on local browser screens that are installed when you install the printing-system
software, and you do not need an Internet service provider to view them.
The HP Toolbox also contains an area with links to the HP Web site. While you do not need to have
Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox, you must have Internet access in order to gain
access to the sites that are associated with the links in the Other Links area.
If your computer is connected to the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp through a network, you can
bookmark the URL of the HP Toolbox so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
The HP Toolbox Frame
Each screen in the HP Toolbox has a frame that contains a top banner, two category tabs, a leftaligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes
the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes
links to the content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and
options in response to selections that you make on an HP Toolbox screen.
See the following sections for more information about HP Toolbox screens:
■
Top banner
■
Status tab
■
Alerts tab
■
Linking to the HP Embedded Web Server
■
Other Links
Top banner
The top banner has an HP logo. Next to the HP logo, the title of the page appears followed by the
product name and a copyright notice. The top banner is the same for all of the HP Toolbox Web
pages. The HP logo contains a link to the HP Web site (http://www.hp.com).
48
2
Software description
Status tab
The Status tab, with the Device Status setting selected, is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 2-13 Toolbox Device Status screen on the Status tab
The Status tab provides the following options:
■
Device Status. This screen shows the percentage of life remaining for each consumable, the
status and configuration information for the input trays and output bins, and the accessories that
are installed on the product.
■
Supplies Status. This screen shows the levels remaining for all consumables and the HP part
numbers for each consumable. It is helpful to have the part numbers available when it is time to
order supplies.
■
Print Info Pages. Print the configuration page and various other information pages that are
available for the product, such as the Supplies Status page, the Demo page, and Menu Map.
■
toolbox Links. Select a device, view current alerts, or view the HP Toolbox Web site in text-only
format (without graphics).
■
Other Links. For information about these links, see Links to off-product solutions in the HP
Embedded Web Server section of this guide.
Technology background information
49
Alerts tab
The Alerts tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 2-14 Current Alerts
The navigation bar on the Alerts tab contains links to the information pages for the product. Some of
these pages are also available from other sources, such as the HP EWS or the product itself. From
this section, you can view the following screens:
50
■
Set up Status Alerts. Choose to turn alerts on or off, specify when the MFP should send an
alert, and select the types of alert desired.
■
Administrative Settings. Set the frequency of how often the HP Toolbox checks for MFP alerts.
■
toolbox Links. Select a device, view current alerts, or view the HP Toolbox Web site in text-only
format (without graphics).
■
Other Links. For information about these links, see Links to off-product solutions in the HP
Embedded Web Server section of this guide.
2
Software description
Linking to the HP Embedded Web Server
To gain access to the HP Embedded Web Server, click the Device Settings button in the upper right
of any HP Toolbox screen. You can also open a browser window and type in the HP Jetdirect IP
address.
The HP Toolbox Device Settings button on the Device Status screen is shown in the following
illustration:
Figure 2-15 Status tab with Device Settings button
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server for HP LaserJet Printer
guide, go to the following URL: http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp_software.
Other Links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. These links appear on the left
navigational bar throughout the HP EWS screens. You must have Internet access in order to use any
of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the
HP Toolbox, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that
you close the HP Toolbox and reopen it.
HP Instant Support. This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that you can use to
solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your product.
Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the Solve
Technology background information
51
a Problem Web site, which offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems
as quickly as possible.
Product Registration. Click this link to connect to a screen where you can register your
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to an ordering screen where you can order genuine HP
supplies, such as print cartridges and print media.
Product Support. This link connects you with an HP product-support screen from which you can
search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for
your product.
HP Web Jetadmin
Use HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect connected products within your
intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a
single network-administration server. It can be installed and run on Red Hat Linux; SuSE Linux;
Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation; Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced
Server; and Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 systems.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,
visit the following Web site: http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
When installed on a host server, any client can use HP Web Jetadmin through a supported Web
browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0).
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
■
Task-oriented user interface that provides configurable views for network managers
■
User profiles that can be customized to let network administrators include only the function that is
being viewed or used
■
Routing of instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other product
problems to different people
■
Remote installation and management from anywhere, using only a standard Web browser
■
Advanced automatic discovery of peripherals on the network without manually typing information
about each product into a database
■
Simple integration into enterprise-management packages
■
Capacity to find peripherals based on parameters such as the Internet protocol (IP) address and
model name
■
Capacity to organize peripherals into logical groups, with an option that provides virtual office
maps for easy navigation
■
Capacity to manage and configure multiple printers at one time
NOTE In the following table, "98/Me" refers to Windows 98 and Windows Me; "2K" refers to
Windows 2000; "4.0" refers to Windows NT 4.0; "XP" refers to Windows XP; “XP 64” refers to
Windows XP for 64-bit drivers.
52
2
Software description
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp remote management and
status tools by operating system.
Table 2-3 Availability of remote management and status tools
Component
98/Me
4.0
2K/XP
XP64
OS/2
Macin
tosh
UNIX
Linux
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp plug-in
for Web
x
x
Device Storage Manager for Web
x
x
x
x
Preconfiguration plug-in for Web
x
x
x
x
x
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD provides the following link to download
the latest version of the HP Web Jetadmin software: http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
Click support on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and then click hp web jetadmin. The
following table shows the supporting operating systems and hardware for HP Web Jetadmin.
Table 2-4 HP Web Jetadmin support
Protocols
Compatible operating systems
■
TCP/IP
■
IPX/SPX
■
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Server,
and Windows Advanced Server
■
Microsoft Windows XP Professional with service pack 1
and Windows Server 2003
■
Microsoft Windows NT Server and Workstation with
service pack 3 or later
■
Red Hat Linux 8.0
■
SuSE Linux v. 8.1
Shared print queue creation support
Technology background information
■
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Server and
Advanced Server
■
Microsoft Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003
■
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation
■
HP-UX®11.0
■
Red Hat Linux 8.0
■
Solaris 2.6, 7, and 8
■
SuSE Linux V8.1
53
Table 2-4 HP Web Jetadmin support (continued)
■
Novell NetWare 5.1 and 6.0 (IPX only) that uses
Netware Client 4.83 (or that uses HP Web Jetadmin
only on a Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 system)
Supported products
All HP and non-HP products that are connected through HP
Jetdirect print servers, and standard Management
Information Base-compliant (MIB-compliant) third-party
network-connected products
Supported browsers
■
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0, for Windows only
■
Netscape 7.0 (English) for all operating systems
Supported products
All HP and non-HP products connected through HP Jetdirect
print servers, and standard MIB-compliant third-party
network-connected products
HP Digital Sending Software
The HP Digital Sending Software (HP DSS) is a software program that, in conjunction with firmware,
enables HP MFPs to send scanned documents directly to electronic mailboxes (e-mail) or to fax
destinations, transforming paper-based information into digital images that can be shared, stored, or
edited. Documents are initially scanned at the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, and then are transmitted
to a network-connected computer where the HP DSS is installed. This prevents users from having to
create an electronic copy of a hard-copy document. The HP DSS can also be configured to require
user authentication, ensuring that only authorized persons use the Digital Sending feature of the
MFP. For more information about HP DSS, see the HP Digital Sending Software Software Technical
Reference
Foreign Interface Harness
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp for thirdparty job accounting vendors to gain access to copy data for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
Remote firmware update
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for
downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the
latest printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
54
1
Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
2
Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to your computer.
3
Download the new firmware to the product.
2
Software description
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration
page, follow these instructions.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4
Press the SELECT button to print the configuration page.
5
Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code.
The firmware date code looks something like this: 20031002 07.000.0.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to http://www.hp.com/
support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp_software.
The product can receive an .RFU update to a product when the product is in a READY state. The
product waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to
default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the
defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets,
and Web-access alerts.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for
the product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed
of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The
reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the
number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of
memory that is installed.
If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while
RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again.
If power is lost during the flash dual inline memory module (DIMM) update (while PERFORMING
UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message
RESEND UPGRADE appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. The update must now
be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the product.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the .RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is
processed.
Use one of the following methods to update your product firmware.
Technology background information
55
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP)
through a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the
second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining
the current level of firmware
2
Open a browser window.
3
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/
IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
FTP://192.168.0.90
4
Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.
5
Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At the
end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to
update your firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Windows operating systems
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware
NOTE Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Powersave
mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
56
2
Open a command window on your computer.
3
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type ftp 192.168.0.90.
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7
Type bin at the command prompt.
8
Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
2
Software description
9
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded
from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\9050MFPFW.RFU, and then
press Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\9050mfpfw.rfu" .
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
10 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
11 At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
12 At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
Macintosh operating systems
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the
second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining
the current level of firmware.
2
Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the
computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3
Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type FTP 192.168.0.90
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6
Type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the
Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/9050mfpfw.rfu, and
then press Enter.
Technology background information
57
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/9050MFPFW.RFU".
To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type put and
a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete
path to the file is automatically placed after the put command .
7
The download process begins and the firmware is updated. This can take about five minutes. Let
the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to
the product by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the
command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
product port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\9050mfpfw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\9050mfpfw.rfu" lpt1
4
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages that are described in Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
58
2
Software description
5
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
6
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt
or in an MS-DOS window.
1
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is
the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\9050mfpfw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\9050mfpfw.rfu" lpt1
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during
the firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
3
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is
being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\9050mfpfw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\9050mfpfw.rfu" \\your_server\your_computer
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during
the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the
computer screen.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Technology background information
59
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .RFU file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>, where </home/
yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .RFU file.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At the
end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)
For Mac OS 9.x, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a put command.
Download and install the program from http://download.com.com/3000-2151-10182446.html.
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using Fetch.
1
Start the program by clicking on the Fetch icon.
2
Type the IP address of the product in the Host: box.
3
Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the .RFU file.
4
Double-click the file to select it and download it to the product. A confirmation message appears
in the main window.
5
Click OK.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only)
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1
Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the 9050MFPFW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software
CD-ROM that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the
HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest product installer from http://www.hp.com.
The firmware file (9050MFPFW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050_firmware .
See Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update
process.
60
2
Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
3
Click Select Printer and locate the product that you would like to update on the network. Select
the product on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK. An information dialog box for the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp appears.
2
Software description
4
On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can
select a file to be downloaded to the product.
5
Click Select File.
6
Locate the 9050MFPFW.RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click
Select. The Files dialog boxes update to show the 9050FW.RFU file under File to download.
7
Click Download. The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the product. A progress
bar shows how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the
RECEIVING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display on the product. After the
file has downloaded to the product the PERFORMING UPGRADE message appears on the
control-panel display.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1
From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME> OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where <IPADDRESS> can be either the
TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of
the .RFU file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during
the firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
3
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin version 7.8 or later on your computer.
Complete the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after
downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2
Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and
then click Go. The product Status window opens.
Technology background information
61
3
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
4
Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to
update in the list of products, and click to select it.
5
Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
6
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in
the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that
you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7
Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8
Refresh the browser.
9
Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10 Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. The
messages that are described in Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update. At
the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
HP Web Jetadmin version 7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended
installations. Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2
Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps:
a. Click Device Management, then click All Devices.
-orb. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.
-orc. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3
To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4
The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if
necessary to view it.
5
In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type in the appropriate
information. Click Return to Device Group when finished.
Printer messages during the firmware update
Three messages appear during a normal update process.
62
2
Software description
Table 2-5 Update messages
Printer message
Explanation
RECEIVING UPGRADE
This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of an .RFU
update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update.
PERFORMING UPGRADE
This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.
INITIALIZING
This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the DIMM
until the product reinitializes.
NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the
control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Troubleshooting a firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 2-6 Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause
Result
The job was cancelled from the control panel.
No update has occurred.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for
example, the parallel cable was removed).
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE
process.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a
parallel port.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.
The update has been completed.
Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the
corrective action required for each situation.
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure
Corrective action
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update.
Download the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file
from http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp_software.
The wrong product is contained in
the .RFU file.
The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download
the correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/
lj9050mfp_software.
The upgrade was interrupted.
See Troubleshooting a firmware update.
Technology background information
63
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure (continued)
Reason for firmware update failure
Corrective action
A flash hardware failure occurred.
Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call
technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the
product for a local telephone support list).
NOTE All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version
installed. If a remote firmware update fails, the .RFU file must be sent over a parallel port
connection.
Printing print-ready documents from a command line
Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not
need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product using a command
line.
■
HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)
■
Portable Document Format (.PDF)
■
Postscript (.PS)
■
Text (.TXT)
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.
NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents.
However, any print-ready file type can be substituted.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files from a command line by using FTP through a
browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
Open a browser window.
3
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP
address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP:// 192.168.0.90
64
4
Locate the print-ready file for the product.
5
Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
2
Software description
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to
print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:
Windows operating systems
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the Configuration page printout. To print a Configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
Open a command window on your computer.
3
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type the following:
ftp 192.168.0.90
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7
Type bin at the command prompt.
8
Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
9
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed,
including the path. For example, type the following:
put C:\LJ\9050MFPFW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\9050mfpfw.pdf"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10 Press Enter on the keyboard.
11 Your print-ready file prints.
12 At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13 At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
Technology background information
65
Macintosh operating systems
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the
computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3
Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type the following:
FTP 192.168.0.90
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6
Type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the print-ready file was downloaded from
the Web. For example, type the following:.
put /username/desktop/9050MFPFW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/9050FW.PDF"
To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type
put and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window.
The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command.
7
Press Enter.
8
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.
9
The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port
To print from the command line by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section
for your operating system.
66
2
Software description
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following::
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the
appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type the
following:
copy /b c:\9050fw.pdf lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\9050mfpfw.pdf"
4
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints.
5
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command
prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the
appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\9050mfpfw.pdf lpt1
2
Press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\9050mfpfw.pdf". The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and
the job prints.
3
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Technology background information
67
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready
file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the
product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the
following:
C:\>copy /b c:\9050mfpfw.pdf \\your_server\sharename
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\9050mfpfw.pdf" \\your_server\sharename
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is
acceptable, including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>, where </
home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)
For Mac OS 9.x, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a put command.
Download and install the program from the following Web site:
http://download.com.com/3000-2151-10182446.html.
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files by using Fetch.
68
1
Start the program by clicking the Fetch icon.
2
Enter the IP address of the product in the Host: box.
3
Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the print-ready file.
4
Double-click the file to select it and download it to the product. A confirmation message appears
in the main window.
5
Click OK.
2
Software description
File printing by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only)
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1
Make sure that you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the print-ready file that you want to print.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software
CD that came with the product. If you do not have the CD, you can obtain the HP LaserJet Utility
by downloading the latest product installer from http://www.hp.com.
After you have the HP LaserJet Utility and you know the location of the print-ready file you want
to print, you are ready to begin the command-line printing process.
2
Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
3
Click Select Printer and locate the product that you would like to upgrade on the network.
4
Select the product on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK. An information dialog box for
the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp appears.
5
On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can
select a file to be downloaded to the product.
6
Click Select File.
7
On your hard disk, locate the print-ready file that you want to print, and click the file name to
highlight it. Then click Select. The Files dialog box updates showing the .print-ready file that you
want to print under File to download.
8
Click Download.
The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the product. A progress bar keeps you
updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the
PROCESSING JOB message appears on the control-panel display on the product, and the printready file prints.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE This command-line printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
From a command window, type the following:
lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and
where FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
Technology background information
69
3
The file prints, but no further messages appear in the command prompt window.
4
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for each
supported operating system that the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports. The printing-system
drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 are the HP Traditional PCL 5, HP
Traditional PCL 6, and PS Emulation Drivers. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and
feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 5, HP PCL 6, and PS Emulation Unidriver.
For more information about the HP Traditional HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation Drivers, see HP
traditional print drivers for Windows. For more information about the HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and
PS Emulation Unidriver see HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows.
Job stream output
Table 2-8 Driver support for job stream output feature
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
PCL 5 support
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
x
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
x
x
x
x
PCL 6 pass-through
support
x
x
x
Postscript 1, 2
70
x
PS
Emulation
x
PCL 6 support
Postscript 3
PCL
5
x
x
x
x
x
2
Software description
PJL/PJL Encoding
Table 2-9 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
PJL support
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
UTF-8 encoding for
PJL (Unicode to 8-bit)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job tracking
Table 2-10 Driver support for job tracking
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PCL
6
PCL
5
Postscript
PRN file driver
identification
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job accounting
information
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job accounting
enhancements (UUID)
PS
Emulation
Reliable Time - born on
date (PJL DMINFO)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Sending user name
with every job
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
Emulation
x
Connectivity
Table 2-11 Driver support for connectivity features
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Parallel (direct connect)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Technology background information
71
Table 2-11 Driver support for connectivity features (continued)
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Network - TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Network - AppleTalk
PAP
x
Wireless
x
Bidirectional communication
Table 2-12 Driver support for bidirectional communication features
Operating System
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PCL
6
PCL
5
Postscript
EAC
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Parallel (direct connect)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Network - TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
Emulation
PS
Emulation
x
Status messages
x
Network - AppleTalk
PAP
x
USB (through 1284.4
port monitor)
x
x
x
Update Now
x
x
x
x
Language Monitor1
x
x
x
x
1
72
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MasterMon, a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with
bidirectional communication products and to insert PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.
2
Software description
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 2-13 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PCL
6
PCL
5
Postscript
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Feature lockout
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Enterprise
Autoconfiguration (EAC)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Continuous export
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
DMC macro automation
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
Emulation
PS
Emulation
Bundle support
Table 2-14 Bundle support
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
Assign Bundle support
through Installer
x
x
x
Printer Bundle in UI
Technology background information
PCL
5
x
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
x
x
x
x
73
Tray and paper assignment
Table 2-15 Tray and paper assignment
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
Assign paper size to tray x
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Assign paper type to tray
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Installable options
Table 2-16 Driver support for installable options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Duplexing unit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printer hard disk
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Total memory
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
DWS (available
memory)
Additional source trays
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Additional destination
bins
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Font DIMM Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
MFP Module
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mopier enabled
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job Storage enabled
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
74
x
2
Software description
UI features
Table 2-17 Driver support for UI features
Operating system
Windows XP (32bit),Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
UI tabs ("Panels" in
Macintosh)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
UI extensions
x
x
x
Page preview images
x
x
x
Printer image bitmaps
with hot spots
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Paper size dimensions
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
About . . .
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Accessibility/Disability
(JAWS)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Accessibility
architecture
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Help features
Table 2-18 Driver support for Help features
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
What's this Help (F1)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Help button
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Bubble Help
MS Windows "?" Help
x
Technology background information
x
x
x
x
75
Quick Sets
Table 2-19 Driver support for quick sets
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PCL
6
PCL
5
Postscript
Print Task Quick Sets
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
User Defined Quick Sets x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
Emulation
PS
Emulation
x
Paper Sizes
Table 2-20 Driver support for paper sizes
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Paper Sizes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
User Defined Custom
Paper
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Edge-to-Edge Laser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Media Types
Table 2-21 Driver support for media types
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PCL
6
PCL
5
Postscript
User Defined Media
Types
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program.
(Always NO driver UI
switch)
x
x
x
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program.
76
PS
Emulation
x
x
x
PS
Emulation
x
x
x
2
Software description
Table 2-21 Driver support for media types (continued)
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
PCL
6
PS
Emulation
Postscript
x
x
x
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
5
(Optional driver UI
switch)
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program.
(In driver UI)
Job storage
Table 2-22 Driver support for job storage features
1
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh1
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh1
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Proof and hold
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Private job
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Quick Copy
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Stored Job
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
User name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PIN
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job storage pop-up
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Automatic job and user
name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job Storage Override
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job Storage features are available only in Mac OS 9.x. They are not available for Mac OS X.
Technology background information
77
Print-quality and resolution
Table 2-23 Print quality and resolution features
Operating system
Windows XP (32bit),Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Print-quality options
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Print-quality - custom
options recall
Economode
x
x
Print optimizations
x
x
Halftoning - Custom
x
x
x
x
x
Rendering mode
(automatic)
x
x
Send graphics as vector
x
x
x
Send graphics as raster
x
x
x
x
x
Send page as raster
Reordering Options
Table 2-24 Driver support for reordering options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
Page Order (reordering
for job)
x
x
x
78
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
2
Software description
Resizing options
Table 2-25 Resizing options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PCL
6
PCL
5
Postscript
Print Document On
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Scale to Fit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Allow Scaling from
Large Paper
x
x
x
% of Normal Size
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Rotate by 180 degrees
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
Emulation
x
x
PS
Emulation
x
x
Watermarks
Table 2-26 Driver support for watermarks feature
1
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh1
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Watermarks on/off
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
First page only
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Custom watermark
definition
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark angle
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font shading
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font size
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font style
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Locally defined
watermarks
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mac OS 8.5 through 9.x only; not supported by Mac OS X or later.
Technology background information
79
Alternative source/paper type
Table 2-27 Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
All pages the same
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Front Cover (Blank
Front Cover Inserted)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
First Page
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Other pages
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Last Page
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Back Cover - Insert
Blank Back Cover
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printing destination
Table 2-28 Driver support for printing destination feature
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Paper Destinations
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Custom Names for
Mailbox Bins
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Finishing Options
Table 2-29 Driver support for finishing options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Auto Duplex / Print on
Both Sides
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
80
2
Software description
Table 2-29 Driver support for finishing options (continued)
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
Long Edge/Short Edge
(Flip On)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Pages per Sheet (N-up)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Page Borders On/Off
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Page Order (N-Up)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Booklet Printing
(Layout through
sofware)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Booklet Target Size
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Staple Options
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Fold / Saddle Stitch
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Font support
Table 2-30 Font support
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5
PS
Emulation
Postscript
General device font
support
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Font substitution
x
x
x
Arabic, Cyrillic,
Hebrew, Greek device
x
PCL
5
x
x
x
x
x
x
Font DIMM (on/off)
x
x
x
x
x
x
Send TrueType as
Bitmap
x
x
x
x
x
x
TrueType Fonts (UI
option)
Print Text as Black
x
x
Technology background information
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
81
Postscript-specific features
Table 2-31 Driver support for postscript-specific features
Operating system
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
Postscript
Driver
PS Emulation
Unidriver
PS Emulation
Driver
PS Emulation
Driver
Postscript
Postscript memory
x
x
x
Output protocol
x
x
x
Send CTRL-D before each job
x
x
x
Send CTRL-D after each job
x
x
x
Convert gray text to postscript gray
x
Convert gray graphics to postscript gray
x
Add euro currency symbol
x
Job timeout
x
x
x
Wait timeout
x
x
x
Minimum font size to download as outline
x
x
Minimum font size to download as bitmap
x
x
Postscript language level
x
x
x
Send postscript error handler
x
x
x
Mirrored output
x
x
x
x
x
Printing Preferences
Negative output
x
Output options
Optimize for speed
x
x
x
Optimize for portability
x
x
x
Encapsulated postscript (EPS)
x
x
x
Archive format
x
x
x
Levels of gray
x
x
Fit to Page
x
x
x
TrueType font download option
Outline
x
x
x
Bitmap
x
x
x
Native TrueType
x
x
x
82
2
Software description
3
HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
The chapter contains the following sections:
■
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver features. This section describes the
HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5 drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
■
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) features. This section
describes the PS Emulation Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program, and
the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are common to two or more of these places (for
instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the
software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings override product
control-panel settings.
Introduction
83
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or
Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5
Driver can be installed by using the Add Printer feature. When you install the print drivers in
Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6
Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP traditional PCL 6 and
PCL 5 Document Default print-driver interface and on some of the tabs of the HP Traditional PCL 6
and HP Traditional PCL 5 Properties print-driver interface.
This section also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP
Traditional PCL 5 Driver.
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, several different
ways are available to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print,
and then click Properties. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0
In Windows NT 4.0, you can gain access to the Document Defaults driver tabs and the Properties
driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print job output.
Document Defaults driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, and then click Document Defaults to gain access to all Printing Preferences print-driver tabs,
which are the same set of driver tabs that the software program controls. These driver settings
change the default settings that are used across all software programs.
The following Document Defaults driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
Finishing tab
■
Output tab
■
Effects tab
■
Paper tab
■
Job Storage tab
■
Basics tab
The HP driver tabs are indicated by the HP logo appearing in the lower-left corner of the driver tab.
Only HP tabs are documented in this STR.
84
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Properties driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, and then click Properties to gain access to all of the Properties print-driver tabs. The
following Properties driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
General tab
■
Sharing tab
■
Ports tab
■
Advanced tab
■
Color Management tab
■
Security tab
■
NT Forms tab
■
Configure tab
NOTE Only the NT Forms tab and the Configure tab are described in this guide. See the
Properties tabs section in this chapter.
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the
product name, and then click Properties to gain access to all of the print-driver tabs. The settings
that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output. The following print-driver tabs are
available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:
■
General tab
■
Details tab
■
Color Management tab
■
Sharing tab
■
Finishing tab
■
Output tab
■
Effects tab
■
Paper tab
■
Job Storage tab
■
Basics tab
■
Configure tab
Help system
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help
system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
85
What's this? Help
What's this? Help is supported in Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0. You can gain
access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
■
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. Apop-up Help window appears.
■
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Options messages
Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in
response to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical
or impossible given the capabilities of the product or the current settings of other controls. For
example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a
message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK or Cancel button, the interpretation of the
button is as follows:
■
Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting
control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
■
Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made, and the control returns to its previous
value.
Bubble Help
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in
it, representing the international symbol for information. The following illustration shows a Bubble
Help icon on a driver tab.
86
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon
The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an
available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the
pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area
underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the
keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled
and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution
that you should be aware of when using that particular feature.
Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows
the Finishing tab.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
87
Figure 3-3 The default Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Document Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any change
to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Finishing tab affects the Print Task
Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Document Defaults driver tabs (the Effects tab, Paper tab,
Job Storage, Basics tab) because they are all the same control.
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator
88
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The
Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Document Defaults driver tabs and you want to
save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name
here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print
Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the
drop-down menu and click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These
administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but
usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their
own use. User-defined Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
■
Default Print Settings
■
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination
that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations
that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have
been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver
Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Driver feature
Feature setting location
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
for Default values
Preconfigurable1
Print on Both Sides
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Off
Yes
Flip Pages Up
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable
Yes
Booklet Printing
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable
Yes
Pages per sheet
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
1
Yes
Print page borders
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable
Yes
Page order
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable
Yes
Print Quality
Finishing tab, Print Quality group box
On
Yes
Print document on
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Off - print on the
size that is specified
on the Paper tab
Yes
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
89
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp (continued)
90
Driver feature
Feature setting location
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
for Default values
Preconfigurable1
Size to print on
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Actual size specified
on the Paper tab
Yes2
Scale to fit
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Unavailable
Yes
Watermarks
Effects tab
(none)
Yes
Watermarks first
page only
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable
Yes
Current watermarks
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark message
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark message
angle
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal
Yes2
Watermark message
angle (angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable unless
Angle option is
selected
Yes
Watermark font name Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Arial
Yes2
Watermark font color
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Gray
Yes
Watermark font
shading
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Very Light
Yes2
Watermark font size
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
80
No
Watermark font style
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Regular
Yes
Use different paper/
covers
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Off - all of the pages
use the same media
No
Size is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Letter
Yes
Source is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Automatically Select
Yes
Type is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Unspecified
Yes
Unlabeled group box
Job Storage tab
Status message
about the
destination of the job
No
Job storage mode
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off
No
Proof and Hold
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
Private Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
Quick Copy
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
Stored Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp (continued)
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Require PIN to print
option
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable
Windows user name
Job Storage tab, User Name group box
Unavailable, selected No
Job name
Job Storage tab, Job Name group box
Unavailable,
Automatic selected
No
PIN to print
Job Storage tab, PIN group box
Unavailable
No
Display Job ID when
printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options
group box
Unavailable
No
Copy
Basics tab, Copies group box
1
Yes
Portrait
Basics tab, Orientation group box
On
Yes
Landscape
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Off
Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Off
Yes
About
Basics tab
1
2
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
for Default values
Preconfigurable1
No
No
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go
to: http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp_software.
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings::
■
Print on Both Sides is set to ON
■
Flip Pages Up is set to ON
■
Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable
■
Pages per Sheet is set to 2
■
Page Order is set to Right then Down
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
■
Print on Both Sides check box
■
Flip Pages Up check box
■
Booklet Printing drop-down menu
■
Pages Per Sheet spin box
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
91
■
Print Page Borders check box
■
Page Order drop-down menu
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
■
Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any type except Labels, Transparency, or Envelope.
■
Size is: is set to any size except Statement, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope B5, Envelope Monarch, Double Postcard (JIS), or Double Japan Postcard Rotated.
When Paper Size is set to Letter, Legal, or A4, selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip
Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp comes with a duplexing
unit installed.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases
printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job
from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the
driver.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed
on both sides, such as labels, and the following media types:
■
Prepunched
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the product needs to
make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the
product to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best
possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode
is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is
used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available.
The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media
orientation that is selected on the Basics tab.
Table 3-2 Page orientation
92
Orientation (Basics tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-2 Page orientation (continued)
Orientation (Basics tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Landscape
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral
binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner
appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back
side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they
were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet Printing
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a
supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet
Printing drop-down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default
setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the
media size that is set on the Paper tab.
■
[paper size] (Left Binding)
■
[paper size] (Right Binding)
When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document
preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet
setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Pages per
Sheet section of this document for more information.
Booklet printing is disabled when A6 or B6 (JIS) is selected as the media size, and an incompatibility
error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
■
Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.
■
%of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.
■
Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet
Printing to tell you why it is disabled.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports both book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages and that can have a different media type for
the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page,
Other Pages, Last Page, or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the
Use Different Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
93
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the
Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software applications.
1
In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2
Click the Finishing tab.
3
Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
4
In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The
booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example,
Letter [Left binding]).
5
Click OK in the print driver.
6
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Figure 3-4 Printing a booklet
94
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Printing a Book
You can print a book in which the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover have
different media types. For more information, see Paper tab features of this chapter.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single
sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and
are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet
drop-down menu provides six settings:
■
1 page per sheet (this is the default)
■
2 pages per sheet
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders
and Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define
the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
■
Right, then Down
■
Down, then Right
■
Left, then Down
■
Down, then Left
The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the
examples in the following illustration.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
95
Figure 3-5 Page-order preview images
■
2 pages per sheet
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Finishing, Output, Effects,
Paper, and Basics tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking on the image. The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the
selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses
when the orientation changes. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Print Quality group box
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp print driver Print Quality group box provides options that control
output settings and font settings.
The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print-quality settings, click the
Details button. Clicking the Details button opens the Print Quality Details dialog box. The Print
Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver that you are using.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following illustration.
96
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-6 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The following options are available:
■
Current Setting group box
■
Font Settings group box
■
Output Settings group box
Current Setting group box
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make
a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"
setting to This is a "Custom" setting.
Font Settings group box
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which
provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special
graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box
is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the
printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Output Settings group box
The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings:.
■
Resolution: 600 dpi
■
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
■
Print all Text as Black is not selected
■
Edge-to-Edge Printing is not selected
Resolution:
Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As resolution is
increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved. However, higher
resolution can also result in longer printing times.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
97
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain
programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is
WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with
programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
Print all Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Edge-to-Edge Printing
Edge to Edge expands the print area to allow printing within 1 mm of the edge of the page. You must
select this option for each print job desired. Due to the physical limitations of the tray, the text or
graphics will be clipped approximately 1 - 2 mm from the physical edge to the paper.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 3-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
The following options are available:
98
■
Current Setting group box
■
Graphic Settings group box
■
Output Settings group box
■
Font Settings group box
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make
a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"
setting to This is a "Custom" setting.
Graphic Settings
The Graphic Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics
rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: option buttons are available:
■
Automatic. This is the default setting.
■
Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination
of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce
higher-quality output.
■
Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
■
Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the
product as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are
experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType
as Bitmaps option has no effect.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for pattern scaling, and to print all text as black.
The default values for the Output Settings are as follows:
■
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
■
Print all Text as Black is not selected
■
Edge-to-Edge Printing is not selected.
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain
programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is
WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with
programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
Print all Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Edge-to-Edge Printing
Edge to Edge Printing expands the print area to allow printing within 1 mm of the edge of the page.
You must select this option for each print job desired. Due to the physical limitations of the tray, the
text or graphics will be clipped approximately 1 - 2 mm from the physical edge to the paper.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
99
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which
provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special
graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box
is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the
printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Economode
The EconoMode check box can be selected in conjunction with any of the print quality settings.
When you select EconoMode, the printer uses less toner on each page. Using this option might
extend the life of your print cartridge and can lower the cost per page, but the option also reduces
print quality. Using the EconoMode feature with non-HP print cartridges can result in spillage or
product damage.
Output tab features
Use the Output tab to select finishing and output options for a document. The following illustration
shows the Output tab.
100
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-8 Output tab
The Output tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Document preview image
■
Product image
■
Output Bin Options group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that
appear on all other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the
administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For
more information, see Finishing tab features.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
101
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking the document preview image.
Product image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Output tab represents the current physical
configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the
image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.
On the Output tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a destination. When
you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The
current destination, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product image hot spot, is
highlighted on the product image. The following points are worth noting:
■
The Automatically Select setting in the Bin: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding
area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the
corresponding part in the product image.
■
Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in
the Bin: option.
Output Bin Options
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp comes with several output device options. The available Output Bin
Options depend on which accessory output device is installed on the product. The options for
accessories are:
■
Not Installed
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
■
HP Multifunction Finisher
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Mailbox Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Stacker Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Job Separator Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Sorter/Collator Mode
When no optional output device accessories are installed on the product, the standard Output Bin
Options are:
102
■
Automatically Select
■
Left Output Bin (Slow Straight Path)
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Effects tab features
The Effects tab is used to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The
following illustration shows the Effects tab.
Figure 3-9 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Fit to Page group box
■
Document preview image
■
Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that
appear on all other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
103
administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For
more information, see Finishing tab features.
Fit To Page group box
The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:
■
Print Document on setting
■
Scale to Fit check box
■
% of Normal Size setting
Print Document On setting
Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on
a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■
% of Normal Size is not 100.
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you
can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media
source, and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to
Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or
enlarged to fit on the selected media size.
Scale to Fit option
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the
target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the
setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at
full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the
document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target
media. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size
media with the Print Document On option selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
Figure 3-10 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target
size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical
page in relation to the target page size.
104
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
% of Normal Size option
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default
setting in the entry box is 100 percent of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media
size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the
software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by
the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are
adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key
is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases
from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator
is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar
affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows
resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the value that you want, and then use the scroll
bar arrows to refine the value. Or, type the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
■
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
Watermarks group box
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only),
or edit an existing watermark.
The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:
■
Watermarks drop-down menu
■
First Page Only check box
■
Edit button (opens the Watermark Details dialog box)
Watermarks drop-down menu
The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
■
(none)
■
Confidential
■
Draft
■
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default
setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
105
First Page Only check box
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document.
The First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Edit button (Watermark Details)
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following illustration shows the
Watermark Details dialog box.
Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark
and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:
106
■
Current Watermarks
■
Watermark Message
■
Message Angle
■
Document preview image
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■
Font Attributes
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created. To create
a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the
Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it. To name the new watermark, type the
selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the
watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one
time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble
Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change
the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this
occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2).
When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list,
then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a diagonal, horizontal, or
angle (custom) orientation to the text on the page. The default is Diagonal. All three settings
automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left
to upper-right corners of the page.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box.
The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
■
Name
■
Shading
■
Size
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
107
■
Style
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The
default is language-dependent.
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
■
Lightest
■
Very Light (default)
■
Light
■
Medium Light
■
Medium
■
Medium Dark
■
Dark
■
Very Dark
■
Darkest
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
Style
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and current watermarks is Regular.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 150 points,
and Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Very Light shading,
and Bold style. The default font name and point size for preset watermarks are language-dependent,
and vary.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then
select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are
saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
108
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Paper tab features
Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to
indicate different paper-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and
back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper tab.
Figure 3-12 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Paper Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Product image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that
appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
109
the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
For more information, see Finishing tab features.
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of
the document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the selections
available by default.
Figure 3-13 Paper Options group box (default)
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described
in the following order:
■
Size is
■
Source Is
■
Type is
■
Custom
■
Use Different Paper/Covers
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
NOTE When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and
metric units.
You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media
size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-
110
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
size media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must
also use Letter-size media.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is
generally best to use the driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size
setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require
different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different
media sizes within a single document.
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Use Different Paper/Covers
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured,
the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more
information, see Use Different Paper/Covers.
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
■
Automatically select
■
Manual Feed in Tray 1
■
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
■
Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
■
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
■
Tray 4 (2000-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have
selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct
media size is loaded in the source tray. For more information about media sources, see the Media
attributes section of this guide.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the product uses the default media type,
which is usually Plain.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
■
Unspecified
■
Plain
■
Preprinted
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
111
■
Letterhead
■
Transparency
■
Prepunched
■
Labels
■
Bond
■
Recycled
■
Color
■
Cardstock
■
Rough
■
Envelope
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source
is: setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab.
The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected
and any setting other than First Page is also selected.
Figure 3-14 Custom Paper Size dialog box
112
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains
one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:
■
If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu
contains the name of that custom size.
■
If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default
name Untitled (plus a number sign "#" and a numerical value) for a custom media size.
NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for
example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4
inches by 11 inches). In Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP, both uppercase
and lowercase names can be used, but they cannot be used to name the same media size.
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not
against the standard media-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and
capabilities are discussed in the Save, Delete, or Rename section.
Name
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most
recently. Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media
sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the
following conditions:
■
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other
controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows
the name of the last selected custom media size.
■
If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or
if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default
name of "Untitled."
■
If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new
size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a
saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click the Save button, you
should be able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved
media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost
without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
113
Save, Delete, or Rename
The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save, Delete, and Rename.
■
Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most
recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button
causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved
names. If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing
item. If you click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver
returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new
name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the
standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default
button.
■
Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size
appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the
drop-down menu or clicking the Save button. Clicking the Delete button causes the saved
custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled,
the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.
■
Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after
selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then
the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name dropdown menu.
The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command
button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
Table 3-3 Name drop-down menu text strings
State
Drop-down menu
contents
Button label
Action
Next state
1
Untitled
Save
Click Save.
3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
2
Change the width or height values.
1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Save.
3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
2
Change the width or height values.
2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Delete.
1
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
4
Change the width or height values.
1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Rename (when the name is unique).
3
Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate).
4
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
4
2
3
4
114
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item>
<user-typed text>
Save
Delete
Rename
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-3 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)
State
Drop-down menu
contents
Button label
Action
Next state
Change the width or height values.
2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Custom size (width and height controls)
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or
by using the up and down arrows.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to
the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and
height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the
nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the
nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height
entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current
measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by
the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at
which the values change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the
measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic
Measurement Units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the
maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits
for each media-handling device.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
115
Table 3-4 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Width
98 mm (3.86 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
190.5 mm (7.50 inches)
470.0 mm (18.5 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17.00 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17.00 inches)
Width
182 mm (7.16 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17.00 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
470 mm (18.5 inches)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (2000-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Paper and envelope icons
The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Dynamic measurement units
Use the Dynamic Measurement Units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic,
depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the
measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows
the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch
measurement-unit types.
Close
The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic in the following
table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted)
while the dialog box is open will remain in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The
following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
Table 3-5 Close dialog box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains
And the button says
Then this happens when the Close
button is clicked
Untitled
Save
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom
button was clicked.
<user-typed text>
116
Save
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-5 Close dialog box text strings (continued)
If the drop-down menu contains
And the button says
Then this happens when the Close
button is clicked
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom
button was clicked.
<name of saved item>
Delete
The dialog box closes, and the current
media size is set to the size that was
last shown in the drop-down menu.
<user-typed text>
Rename
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom
button was clicked.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in
the group box, along with associated options:
■
Front Cover
■
First Page
■
Other Pages
■
Last Page
■
Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is:
driver setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
Therefore, the First Page settings are described first in the following sections.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to
include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the
document.
The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
117
Figure 3-15 Front Cover options
The Front Cover options are as follows:
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see
the Source Is section of this chapter.
TheType is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is:drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of
this chapter.
118
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
First Page
Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.
Figure 3-16 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting
becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
119
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First
Page) for the other pages of the document.
The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following illustration.
Figure 3-17 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
120
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 3-18 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
121
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.
The following illustration shows the Back Cover setting and options.
Figure 3-19 Back Cover setting
122
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The following are the Back Cover options:
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page
would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see
the Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of
this chapter.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver
tabs except the Job Storage tab. For more information about the document preview image, see the
Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
Product image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical
configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the
image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.
On the Paper tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When
you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The
current media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product image hot
spot, is highlighted on the product image. The following points are worth noting:
■
The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a
corresponding area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu
highlights the corresponding part in the product image.
■
Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in
the Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down
menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image.
■
On the Paper tab, only source trays have product image hot spots and can be highlighted.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
123
Job Storage tab features
You can store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp memory for printing at a later time. These
job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory,
install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage
features. A minimum total memory of 48 MB is required to use Job Storage features.
When a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the
changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update
Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Configure tab features
in this chapter.
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers.
2
Right-click the product name, click Properties, and then click the Configure tab.
3
Under Other Options, click More....
4
If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down
menu. If you select a minimum of 48 MB, this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.
5
If a hard disk has been installed, select the Printer Hard Disk check box in the Storage group
box. This also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.
6
Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available.
NOTE You can disable Job Storage while leaving the product hard disk enabled. To disable
Job Storage, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, click Properties, click the Configure tab, click More..., and then click to clear the Job
Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box. When Job Storage is
disabled, the Job Storage tab is not visible.
If Job Storage is enabled (without installing a hard disk), two Job Storage Mode settings are
available on the Job Storage tab:
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk
is installed:
■
Quick Copy
■
Stored Job
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
124
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-20 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Status group box (unlabeled)
■
Job Storage Mode group box
■
PIN group box
■
Job Notification Options group box
■
User Name group box
■
Job Name group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control is to store the current combination of driver settings that
appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
125
(by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per
sheet. For more information, see Finishing tab features.
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp to store documents at the
product and then control their printing at the product control panel.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
■
Off
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
■
Quick Copy
■
Stored Job
■
Require PIN to Print (available when Stored Job is selected)
These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the
print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a
minimum total memory of 48 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining
copies of the print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print
jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If
more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second
proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing
job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu,
and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the
oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is
already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
126
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum
total memory of 48 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request
the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job
can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job
is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential
documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies
are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that
has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the
original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are
deleted if you turn off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You
must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled PIN is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the Private Job
option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If
you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four
characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four
digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN
contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed, and Job Storage must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the
product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The
number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control
panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu,
and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the
oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is
already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are
deleted if you turn off the product.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the
product must have a minimum total memory of 64 MB.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The
print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the
product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
127
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the
same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned
off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job
to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at
the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job
remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The private mode is
initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the
product control panel is required in order to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when
you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN in the PIN to
Print: field to make the stored job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are
deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product
after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
Job Notification options
Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as
well as the product name, port, and location.
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are
the User Name settings:
■
User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job. The
Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options.
■
Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom radio button, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field
can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because
the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character,
it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than
32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the
characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is
truncated.
Job Name
Use the Job Name text box to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. This
text box uses Automatic as the default job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file
name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program
name or a time stamp is used for the job name. To enter a custom name, type the custom job name
in the text box. The Job Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A
through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try
to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an
ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit
128
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any
character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with Automatic. In
those languages for which Automatic cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the
driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for
each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product
control-panel display.
PIN
The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated
if you select either of the following options:
■
Select Private Job. If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the product control panel in
order to print the job. For more information, see Using a PIN for Private Job.
■
Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to
Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For
more information, see the Stored Job.
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
Job Storage features.
2
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3
Click the Job Storage tab.
4
Select the Job Storage options described previously by clicking the appropriate option button,
and then complete any required fields.
5
Click OK.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from
the product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
PRINT JOB is highlighted.
5
Press the SELECT button.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
129
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the up and down buttons to select the number of copies to print.
8
Press the SELECT button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
5
Press the up and down buttons to select Delete.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the SELECT button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Basics tab features
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation
of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
130
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-21 Basics tab
The Basics tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Copies group box
■
Orientation group box
■
Document preview image
■
About button
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on all of the Properties driver tabs (the Finishing,
Output, Effects, Paper, Job Storage, and Basics tabs). The feature is used to store the current
combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either
preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages
per sheet. For more information, see the Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
131
Copies
Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number
by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are
numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp. The copies value will not advance from
the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum
number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Basics
tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers
greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The
default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does
not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10
copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being
printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which
media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available
orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the
page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an
orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
■
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
■
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
■
Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180 degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image.
If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview
image.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Properties driver tabs (the
Finishing, Output, Effects, Paper, Job Storage, and Basics tabs). For more information about the
document preview image, see Finishing tab features.
About
When you click the About button on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver
Properties tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close the About box, click OK,
132
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
press Esc, press Alt + F4, or press Enter. The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog
box. The information it contains varies according to driver, date, and version.
Figure 3-22 About This Driver dialog box
The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:
■
Printer name
■
Driver name
■
Print driver version number
■
Copyright information
■
Driver Extensions (if any)
■
Configuration Status
The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information
appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.
The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.
The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether
administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the
configuration is default or user-defined.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
133
Properties tabs
The Properties tabs contain information about and options for configuring the product.
NT Forms tab features
NOTE The NT Forms tab is in the Properties for the print driver.
To gain access to the Properties tabs, click Start on the Window task bar, click Settings, and
then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
The NT Forms tab appears only in the Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 operating environment. The NT
Forms tab (like the Configure tab) can be viewed only from the Properties window. The following
illustration shows the NT Forms tab.
Figure 3-23 NT Forms tab
Use the NT Forms tab to specify which media sizes and types are loaded in each of the available
source trays. This constrains the choices that are available in the Size and Type lists on the Paper
tab.
134
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The NT Forms tab contains a single group box (the Form/Tray Assignments group box) which
contains the following controls:
■
Available Trays is a drop-down menu that contains all the trays that are specified on the
Configure tab.
■
This Tray Contains/Size (Forms) drop-down menu contains a list of standard media sizes that
the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports, as well as any custom forms that are defined in the NT
Forms tab.
■
This Tray Contains/Type drop-down menu lists all of the media types that the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports.
■
Clear All button removes all the size and type constraints on the Paper tab.
Configuring the trays
1
Select the appropriate tray from the Available Trays drop-down menu.
2
Use the This Tray Contains/Size (Forms) drop-down menu to select the media size (or form)
that is loaded in that tray.
3
Use the This Tray Contains/Type drop-down menu to select the media type that is configured
for the tray.
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining trays.
5
Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Clear All button to reconfigure all of
the trays and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper tab.
Configure tab features
NOTE The Configure tab is in the Properties for the print driver.
To gain access to the Properties tabs, click Start on the Window task bar, click Settings, and
then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration. If bidirectional
communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking the Update Now
button. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is
unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking
Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a
few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers
folder, the Configure tab looks like the following illustration.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
135
Figure 3-24 Configure tab
The Configure tab contains the following controls:
■
Paper Handling Options group box
■
Other Options group box
■
Automatic Configuration group box
■
Product image
Paper Handling Options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:
136
■
Tray one Installed check box
■
Mopier Enabled check box
■
Optional Paper Destinations drop-down menu
■
Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Tray One Installed
Select this check box if Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) is installed. When this option is selected, the Tray
1 and Manual Feed in Tray 1 options are available on the Paper tab under Source is.
Mopier Enabled
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and
reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it on the hard
disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in
mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates
the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has
an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 48 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the
Configure tab is on.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver
performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is
controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is
selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by clearing the Mopier Enabled selection on
the Configure tab to disable the feature.
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application
Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click the
More... button on the Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the
Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control
collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the
Ignore Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature
is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column,
"Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.
Table 3-6 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier Enabled
Application collation
Ignore Application
Collation
Expected result
Not selected
Not selected
Not available
3 copies uncollated
Not selected
Selected
Not available
3 copies collated
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Selected
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Selected
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated by printer
Selected
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated by printer
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
137
Optional Paper Destinations
The Optional Paper Destinations drop-down menu lists optional output devices for the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp. The list of available destinations varies depending on your product , its
output accessories, and the product configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
■
Not Installed This is the default setting for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
■
HP Multifunction Finisher
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Mailbox Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Stacker Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Job Separator Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Sorter/Collator Mode
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp. The list of available source trays varies depending on your product , its
input accessories, and the product configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
■
Not Installed This is the default setting for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
■
2000-Sheet Input tray
Other Options
The Other Options group box contains a single More... command button. Clicking the More... button
opens the More Configuration Options dialog box.
More configuration options
When you click the More... button under Other Options, more configuration options are available.
The More Configuration Options dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
138
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-25 More Configuration Options dialog box
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:
■
Storage group box
■
Fonts group box
■
Include Types in Application Source List check box
■
Ignore Application Collation check box
■
Printer Memory group box
■
Alternative Letterhead Mode
Storage
The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes.
TheHP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is equipped with a hard disk drive, and the Printer Hard Disk check
box should be selected and all job storage options are available. When job storage is enabled, the
product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the product
control panel.
Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.
Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored
data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button
is enabled. Click the Configure button to open the Configure Font Card(s) dialog box. If the Font
Card(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box,
selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
139
Figure 3-26 Configure Font Cards dialog box
Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:
■
Add up to two font cards by clicking the Add button.
■
Specify a unique font-card name.
■
Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.
■
Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts)
shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).
■
Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Complete the following steps to configure a font card:
140
1
Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.
2
Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears.
3
Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears.
4
Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.
5
Click OK.
6
You can specify a font card name in the Add Font Card dialog box.
7
Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file
to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.
8
Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available
on the system.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
NOTE When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 5 and HP Traditional PCL 6
drivers: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically
designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is
specifically designed to work with that card.
Include types in application source list
NOTE The Include types in application source list check box is available only when using
a computer that is running Windows NT 4.0.
When the Include types in application source list check box is selected, all media types (such as
heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you
are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu, and
then clicking Properties.
Ignore Application Collation
This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program.
When Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way
for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.
Printer memory
The Total Memory group box shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the
product. The default values for total product memory are specified on the Configuration tab. Total
product memory is updated through a successful bidirectional query, or can be set manually.
The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track
of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded
the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the
specific configuration of the product. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.
The HP Traditional PCL 6 and HP Traditional PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the (DWS) value
in Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 environments that support bidirectional
communication. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available
to the product. To manually set the (DWS) value, print a Configuration page and find the DWS value
in the Memory section of the page. Then, click the More... button on the Configuration tab, and type
the DWS value in the (DWS) field of the More Configuration Options dialog box.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option enables you to always load letterhead or pre-printed paper the same way
for all print jobs, whether you are printing on one side of the sheet or both sides of the sheet. Load
the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates to load
paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper opposite of the orientation shown.
When this option is selected, the printer speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides.
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp since installation, click the
Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information
about the print driver's automatic configuration feature, see the Driver Configuration section of this
guide.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
141
If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the
Configure tab.
Product image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical
configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same
appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper and Output tabs.
NOTE The printer image shown on the Configure tab might differ from your
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, depending on the installed accessory devices.
142
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the
PS Emulation Driver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. When you install the print
drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer install method to install the PS Emulation
Driver.
Depending on the operating system that you are using when you install the print drivers, different
methods are available to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver
Document Default interface and on one of the tabs of the PS Emulation Driver Properties
interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
NOTE The information and illustrations in this section reflect the PS Emulation Driver when
the computer is running Windows NT 4.0. The PS Emulation Driver looks significantly different
for computers that are running Windows 98 and Windows Me.
Access to Document Default print-driver settings in Windows NT 4.0
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print,
and then click Properties. These driver settings apply only while the software program is open.
You can also control the Document Default print driver settings directly from the Printers folder. In
Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, click Printers, right-click the product name, and then
click Document Defaults to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that the software program
controls. These driver settings change the default settings used across all software programs.
The following Document Default print driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
Page Setup tab
■
Advanced tab
■
Job Storage tab
Access to Properties print-driver settings in Windows NT 4.0
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, and then click Properties to gain access to all Properties print-driver tabs. The following
Properties print-driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
General
■
Ports
■
Scheduling
■
Sharing
■
Security
■
Device Settings
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
143
NOTE Only the Device Settings tab is described in this guide.
PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to
permanently install the fonts in the product, postscript fonts are also available from HP in an optional
font DIMM. The PS emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript
fonts are purchased from Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print
drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the
Adobe PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on
the Adobe Web site at: http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html.
See the Font support section of this guide for a list of the additional fonts.
Help system
The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and
configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the
PS Emulation Driver.
What's this Help
In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0, What's this? Help is supported. You can gain
access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
■
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. .A pop-up Help window appears.
■
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Page Setup tab features
The Page Setup tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The
following illustration shows the Page Setup tab.
144
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-27 Page Setup tab
The Page Setup tab contains the following controls:
■
Paper Size drop-down menu. Click this to specify the media size (form). The list of available
forms matches those that the product supports.
■
Paper Source drop-down menu. Use these settings to select a tray. The default setting is
Automatically Select.
■
Copy Count spin box. Use this box to specify the number of copies.
■
Orientation group box. The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on
the page.
■
Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing) group box. The settings in this group box specify
whether or not the print job is double-sided. It only appears if the duplexer is installed.
Advanced tab features
The Advanced tab controls the settings for output, graphics, and printer features. The following
illustration shows the Advanced tab.
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
145
Figure 3-28 Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
■
Paper/Output settings (advanced control over the options that are available on the Page Setup
tab)
■
Graphic settings (including scaling and TrueType font controls)
■
Document Options settings (including product features and postscript options)
Paper/Output
The following Paper/Output settings are available:
146
■
Paper Size
■
Orientation
■
Paper Source
■
Copy Count
■
Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Graphic
The following Graphic settings are available:
■
Scaling. Use this setting to reduce or enlarge documents by a specified percentage. When you
enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page will print. The default
setting is 100%.
■
TrueType Font. The default setting is Substitute with Device Font. The other available setting
is Download as Softfont. Use this setting when your document has overlapping text and
graphics.
Document Options
The following Document Options settings are available:
■
Page Layout (N-up) Option
■
PostScript Options
■
Printer Features
Page Layout Option
The Page Layout (N-up) Option specifies whether the N-up printing feature is enabled. The
following settings are available:
■
Normal (One-up). This is the default setting.
■
Two-up (1x2). The print job prints two pages per sheet.
■
Four-up (2x2). The print job prints four pages per sheet.
■
Six-up (2x3). The print job prints six pages per sheet.
■
Nine-up (3x3). The print job prints nine pages per sheet.
■
Sixteen-up (4x4). The print job prints 16 pages per sheet.
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
147
PostScript Options
The settings for the PostScript options are as follows:
■
■
148
PostScript Output Option offers the following settings:
■
Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting.
■
Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe
Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a selfcontained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it
on a different product.
■
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another
document that is to be printed from a different program.
■
Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later.
TrueType Font Download Option offers the following settings:
■
Automatic (default )
■
Outline
■
Bitmap
■
Native TrueType
■
The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the
highest level that your product supports. Some products support multiple levels. It is usually best
to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more
features. In some instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing
a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 printer, you would need to
select level 1. The PostScript Language Level spin box offers settings 1 through 3.
■
Send PostScript Error Handler specifies whether a PostScript error handler message is sent. If
you want the product to print an error page when an error occurs in the print job, click Yes.
■
Mirrored Output specifies mirrored print output. Click Yes to print a mirror image of your
document by reversing the horizontal coordinates.
■
Negative Output specifies print output similar to a film negative . Click Yes to print a negative of
the image by reversing the values for black and white.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Printer Features
Printer Features options are as follows:
■
■
■
Output Bin
■
Automatically Select
■
Upper Left Bin
■
Upper Left Bin (Straightest Path)
■
Lower Left Bin (Highest Capacity)
■
Output Bins 2-8
■
Output Bin 2
■
Output Bin 3
■
Output Bin 4
■
Output Bin 5
■
Output Bin 6
■
Output Bin 7
■
Output Bin 8
Stapling Options
■
None
■
One Staple Portrait
■
One Staple Landscape
■
One Staple Angled Portrait
■
One Staple Angled Landscape
■
Two Staples Portrait
■
Two Staples Landscape
■
Three Staples Portrait
■
Three Staples Landscape
■
Six Staples Portrait
■
Six Staples Landscape
■
Fold/Saddle Stitch
Rotate by 180 degrees
■
Off (default)
■
On
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
149
■
■
■
■
150
Economode
■
False (default)
■
True
Collate
■
On (turn off in application)
■
Off
Fit to Page
■
Prompt User (default)
■
Nearest Size and Scale
■
Nearest Size and Crop
■
Letter
■
A4
Watermark. The following settings are available:
■
None (default)
■
Draft
■
Company Confidential
■
Company Proprietary
■
Company Private
■
Confidential
■
Copy
■
Copyright
■
File Copy
■
Final
■
For Internal Use Only
■
Preliminary
■
Proof
■
Review Copy
■
Sample
■
Top Secret
■
Urgent
■
Custom
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■
■
Watermark (Pages per Sheet)
■
1 (default)
■
>= 2
Watermark Font
■
Courier Bold
■
Times Bold
■
Helvetica Bold (default)
■
Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. 48 points is
the default.
■
Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90 degrees to -90 degrees in 15degree intervals. A 45-degree angle is the default.
■
Watermark Style
■
■
Narrow Outline
■
Medium Outline (default)
■
Wide Outline
■
Wide Halo Outline
■
Filled
Print Watermark
■
No (default)
■
All Pages
■
First Page Only
Job Storage tab features
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp lets you store print jobs in the product's memory for printing at a
later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory,
install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage
features. A minimum total memory of 48 MB is required to use Job Storage features.
When a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the
changes in the product.
Bidirectional communication is not supported in Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT 4.0, the
operating environments that support the PS Emulation Driver. The driver must therefore be updated
manually.
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
151
To configure the driver manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers.
2
Right-click the product name, click Properties, and then click the Device Settings tab.
3
If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and
then select the option that matches the total amount of memory currently installed.
4
If a hard disk has been installed, select Printer Hard Disk: under Installable Options, and then
select Installed in the Change 'Printer Hard Disk' Setting dialog box that appears.
5
Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available.
NOTE You can disable Job Storage while leaving the product hard disk enabled. To disable
Job Storage, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, click Properties, click the Device Settings tab, select Job Storage:, and then select
Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears. When Job Storage is
disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
Figure 3-29 Job Storage tab
152
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
■
Status group box (unlabeled)
■
Job Storage Mode group box
■
Job Identification group box
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp to store documents at the
product and then control their printing at the product control panel. This feature is intended to provide
greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
■
Off
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
■
Quick Copy
■
Stored Job
■
Require PIN to Print (available when Stored Job is selected)
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the
print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a
minimum total memory of 48 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining
copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that
can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If
more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second
proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing
job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
153
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu,
and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the
oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is
already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum
total memory of 48 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request
the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN text box. The print job
can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job
is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential
documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies
are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that
has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the
original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are
deleted if you turn off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You
must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled Job Identification is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the
Private Job option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If
you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four
characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four
digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN
contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed, and Job Storage must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the
product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The
number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control
panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu,
and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the
oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is
already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are
deleted if you turn off the product.
154
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the
product must have a minimum total memory of 64 MB.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The
print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the
product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the
same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned
off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job
to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at
the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the Job Identification group box.) After the job is
printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The
private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is
typed at the product control panel is required in order to release the job.
The text box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available
when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print check box, you must type a PIN
to make the stored job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are
deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product
after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
Job Identification
The Job Identification group box contains the following controls:
■
User Name text box
■
Job Name text box
■
PIN text box
User Name
Use the User Name text box to help identify the job at the product control panel. The Windows user
name automatically appears in the User Name text box. To enter a custom user name, type the
custom user name in the text box. The User Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters,
and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the product controlpanel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try
to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is
removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than
16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
Job Name
Use the Job Name text box to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. This
text box uses Untitled as the default job name associated with the stored print job. The file name of
the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a
time stamp is used for the job name. To enter a custom name, type the custom job name in the text
box. The Job Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
155
and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a
lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII
code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field,
along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character
beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with UNTITLED. In
those languages for which UNTITLED cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the
driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for
each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product
control-panel display.
PIN
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The PIN text box is activated if you select either of the
following options:
■
Select Private Job. If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the product control panel in
order to make the job print. For more information, see Using a PIN for Private Job.
■
Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to
Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For
more information, see Stored Job.
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without Job
Storage features.
2
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3
Click the Job Storage tab.
4
Select one of the Job Storage options described above by clicking the appropriate option button
and complete any required fields.
5
Click OK.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from
the product control panel.
156
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
PRINT is highlighted.
5
Press the SELECT button.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the up and down buttons to select the number of copies to print.
8
Press the SELECT button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
5
Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the SELECT button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Device Settings tab
NOTE The Device Settings tab is in the Properties for the print driver in Windows NT 4.0.
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, a tab with similar options and settings is called the Device
Options tab.
To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select
Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
The Device Settings tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print
driver. The Device Settings tab appears when you open the driver from the Printers folder by
selecting and right-clicking the printer, and then clicking Properties for the driver. When the driver is
opened from within a software program, the Device Settings tab is not visible.
When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Settings tab appears, as shown in the following
illustration.
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
157
NOTE The illustration below shows the Device Settings tab in Windows NT 4.0. The
appearance of the equivalent tab in Windows 98 follows this illustration.
Figure 3-30 Device Settings tab in Windows NT 4.0
The following illustration shows the Device Options tab in Windows 98.
158
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-31 Device Options tab in Windows 98
NOTE Changes that you make to the Device Settings tab are not reflected in the
Document Defaults settings until the modified device settings have been applied. For
example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device Settings tab, apply
the settings, and then re-open Document Defaults.
The Device Settings tab contains the following options:
■
Form to Tray Assignment
■
Font Substitution Table
■
PostScript Configurations
■
Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
Many products support more than one source of media, such as upper and lower trays. You can
assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each of your product media sources.
When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print from your software
programs. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Document Defaults driver tabs. This
constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional
accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
159
setting. For example, for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, trays 1 and 4 are listed in both the Form to
Tray Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Page Setup tab.
Font Substitution Table
Clicking this option opens the font substitution table and makes available the options for changing
the TrueType-to-PostScript font mapping.
PostScript Configurations
The following controls are available and appear in the PS Emulation Driver.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for
changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical
memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration
page. To print a configuration page from the control panel, press the Select button (the one with the
check mark) to open the menus. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION,
and then press the SELECT button. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT
CONFIGURATION, and then press the SELECT button.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are
available:
■
ASCII (default)
■
TBCP
■
Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be
sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control
characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial
communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The
binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending
data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript
document. The default setting is No. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that
previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the
product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product
connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
160
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The
default setting is Yes. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs
are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is
connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No.
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before
the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying
to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the
computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints
an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase
this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300
seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts
as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type
3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option
on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin
box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType
fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an
outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send
TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in
Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp. The following controls are available:
■
Tray 1
■
Tray 4
■
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
■
Printer Hard Disk
■
Accessory Output Bin
■
Job Storage
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
161
■
Mopier Mode
■
Printer Memory
Tray 1
This control specifies whether you have Tray 1, an additional 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray,
installed on your product. The default setting is Installed.
Tray 4
This control specifies whether you have Tray 4, an additional 2000-sheet media tray, installed on
your product. The default setting is Installed.
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which
allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for
certain media types, including transparencies, labels, envelopes, heavy, extra heavy, cardstock, and
glossy film.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports smart duplexing. The product uses the
smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only
runs the pages through the duplexing unit if there is printable information on the second side
of the page.
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print
driver. The Job Storage option allows you to store print jobs, and then print them later from the
control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces
multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Accessory Output Bin
This control specifies whether you have any accessory output devices installed on your product. The
available accessory output devices are:
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Mailbox Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Stacker Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Job Separator Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Sorter/Collator Mode
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
■
HP Multifunction Finisher
Job Storage
When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those
print jobs later at the control panel.
162
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and
reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it on the hard
disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in
mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates
the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier
Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept.
The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
When a minimum total memory of 64 MB is installed, the Stored Job option and the Mopier Mode
are enabled in the print driver. The Stored Job option allows you to store print jobs, and then print
them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed
feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
HP traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
163
164
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
4
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS
emulation unidrivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp unidrivers. The unidrivers are
the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (the
PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program print
dialog, and the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one
location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are
established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings,
in turn, override product control-panel settings.
Introduction
165
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print
drivers in various operating systems, see the Driver-feature comparison in various operating
systems section of this guide.
When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 Unidriver and
the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6, the HP
PCL 5, and the PS Emulation Unidriver interface.
The sections also describe differences between the HP PCL 6, the HP PCL 5, and the PS Emulation
Unidrivers.
Access to print drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print, and then
click Properties. The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the
operating system. These settings apply only while that software program is open.
You can also control the drivers directly from the printers folder. These settings change the default
settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to the printers folder, click Start,
select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP
Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP
Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Printing Preferences to gain access to the
same set of driver tabs that the software program controls.
If, after right-clicking the product name, you click Properties, you gain access to a different set of
tabs that control the driver behavior and driver connections.
Help system
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a fullfeatured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP Traditional PCL 6 and HP traditional PCL 5 drivers, is
not available in the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidrivers.
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support "What's this?" Help. You can gain
access to "What's this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
166
■
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
■
Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible print settings may result in unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific
actions that you take. These messages alert you that the selections are illogical or impossible given
the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture may
accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the printer to perform. Sending a job
with incompatible settings may lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as
expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities.
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some
technically invalid print-driver configurations result in the appearance of warning messages.
Duplexing, for instance, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following
illustration shows an Incompatible Print Settings message.
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message
Clicking the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option button and then clicking OK accepts
the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is
compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the
conflict myself and then click OK.
Advanced tab features
You can use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure
special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and
copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print
dialog box or through the page settings in the software program). The following illustration shows the
Advanced tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
167
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
■
Paper/Output settings
■
Graphic settings
■
Document Options settings
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:
168
■
Copy Count setting
■
Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count)
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Copy Count
This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is
available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program. Copy Count specifies
the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the
number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid
entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp. The copies value will not
advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the
maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave
the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than
1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared
in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does
not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10
copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being
printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes
available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies
of each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box.
Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using
Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the
print driver, the Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software
program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by
default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the
software program. Similarly, if the Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate
setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.
Graphic
The Graphic setting contains a control for True Type Font: options.
True Type Font:
Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) for printing documents that contain TrueType
fonts using equivalent printer fonts. This will permit faster printing; however, you might lose special
characters that the printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download
TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
169
Document Options
The Document Options setting contains the following controls:
■
Advanced Printing Features
■
Print Optimizations
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,
depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at
the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some
advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been
disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the
Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.
Print Optimizations
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5
Unidrivers. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your
document contains overlapping text and graphics, text placed on top of a graphic might not print
correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When disabled, print
optimization features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for
horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.
Printer Features
The Printer Features setting contains the following controls:
■
Alternative Letterhead Mode
■
Edge-to-Edge
■
Print All Text as Black
■
Send True Type as Bitmap (HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5 Unidrivers only)
Alternative Letterhead Mode
The Alternative Letterhead Mode feature is Off by default. When this feature is selected, you can
load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing on one
side of the sheet or on both sides of the sheet.
Load the paper as you would when printing on both sides. See the user documentation that came
with the printer for instructions about loading letterhead for printing on both sides. If the printer tray
has an icon that indicates to load the paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper in the
opposite direction from the orientation shown. When this option is selected, the printer speed slows
to the speed that is required for printing on both sides.
NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode will only work ly if the product is equipped with an
automatic duplexing unit.
170
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Edge-to-Edge
The Edge-to-Edge feature is Disabled by default. Select Enabled to expand the print area to within
one millimeter (1 mm) of the edge of the page.
Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver
prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black,
except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Send TrueType as Bitmap
NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP PCL
5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for those software programs that have trouble
using TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting
is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are first converted to bitmap soft fonts before
downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as
outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
Layout Options
The Layout Options setting contains the following control:
■
Page Order
Page Order
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back
prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1
prints last. The Back to Front setting is useful if you are printing to a face-up output bin to achieve
output in the correct order.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on
individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be
greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.
Paper/Quality tab features
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this
tab to indicate different media-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page,
and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper/Quality tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
171
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Paper Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any
change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects most
of the Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing, and Job Storage
tabs) because they are all the same control.
172
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available).
Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing
specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control
does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These
administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but
usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their
own use. User-defined Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
■
Default Print Settings
■
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination
that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations
that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have
been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no
other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings
match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same
label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the HP Driver
Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values
for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default values
for other
languages (if
different)
Preconfigurable
1
Print on Both
Sides
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Available, not
selected
Yes
Flip Pages Up
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable
Yes
Booklet Layout
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable
Yes
Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
1
Yes
Print Page
Borders
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable
Yes
Page Order
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable
Yes
Orientation
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Portrait
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
Yes
173
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp (continued)
Driver feature
174
Feature setting location
Default values
for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default values
for other
languages (if
different)
Preconfigurable
1
Rotate by 180
degrees
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Resizing
Options
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Actual Size
Yes
Print document
on
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Available, not
selected
Yes
Size to print on
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Actual Size
Scale to Fit
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Selected, not
available
Yes
% of Normal
Size
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Available, not
selected
Yes
Watermarks
Effects tab
(none)
Yes
Watermarks
First Page Only
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box
Unavailable
Yes
Current
watermarks
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes
Watermark
Message
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark
Message Angle
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
Diagonal
Yes2
Watermark
Message Angle
(angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
Unavailable
unless the Angle
option is selected
Yes
Watermark
Font Name
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
Arial
Watermark
Font Shading
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
Very Light
Yes2
Watermark
Font Size
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
80
No
Watermark
Font Style
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
Regular
Yes2
Size is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Letter
The default value
depends on the
regional media
size.
Languagedependent
The default value
depends on
regional media
size.
Yes
Yes2
Yes
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp (continued)
Driver feature
1
2
Feature setting location
Default values
for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default values
for other
languages (if
different)
Preconfigurable
1
Use Different
Paper
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Available, not
selected
No
Source is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Automatically
Select
Yes
Type is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Unspecified
Yes
EconoMode
(may save Print
Cartridges)
Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality
group box
Available, not
selected
Yes
Unlabeled
group box
Job Storage tab
Status message
about the
destination of the
job
No
Job Storage
Mode
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Off is selected
No
Proof and Hold
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Private Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Quick Copy
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Stored Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Require PIN to
Print
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Unavailable
No
Windows User
Name
Job Storage tab, User Name group
box
Selected, not
available
(Windows User
Name appears in
field)
No
Job Name
Job Storage tab, Job Name group
box
Unavailable,
Automatic
selected
No
PIN to Print
Job Storage tab, PIN group box
Unavailable
No
No
Display Job ID
when printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification
Options group box
Selected, not
available
No
No
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, See HP Driver Preconfiguration, or
go to: http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp_software.
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp User Guide.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
175
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
■
On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Plain.
■
On the Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality is set to FastRes 1200.
■
On the Finishing tab, Print on Both Sides is set to ON.
■
On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up is set to ON.
■
On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2.
■
On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down.
Type new Quick Set name here
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to
save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name
here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task
Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the dropdown menu and click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These
administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but
usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their
own use. User-defined Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the
selections that are available by default.
176
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described
in the following order:
●
Size is
●
Custom Paper Size
●
Use Different Paper/Covers
●
Source Is
●
Type is
●
Use Different Paper/Covers
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a
gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is
generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs
that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that
does not require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different
media sizes within a single document.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
177
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom... button on the Paper/
Quality tab. The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog
box.
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:
■
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/Quality
tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size.
■
If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box
shows the default name of "Custom."
■
If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or
renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is
saved or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click the Save button, you should be
able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog
box without clicking the Save button, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
178
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Paper size
The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the
Paper Size group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to
the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and
height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the
nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the
nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height
entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current
measurement units.
Units
To change measurement units, select one of the radio buttons in the Units group box (either Inches
or Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the
maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits
for each media-handling device.
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Width
98 mm (3.86 inches)
312 mm (12.3 inches)
Height
190.5 mm (7.5 inches)
470.0 mm (18.5 inches)
Width
148 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Width
148 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17 inches)
Width
182 mm (7.16 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17.0 inches)
Width
148 mm (5.83 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.27 inches)
470 mm (18.5 inches)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (2000-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Use Different Paper/Covers
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured,
the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more
information, see the Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter of the guide.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
179
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
■
Automatically select
■
Printer Auto Select
■
Manual Feed in Tray 1
■
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
■
Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
■
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
■
Tray 4 (2000-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have
selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct
media size is loaded in the source tray. For information about media sources, see the Media
attributes section of this guide.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type,
which is usually Plain.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can
be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in
the product when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the
information returned is an updated list of media types. If bidirectional communication is not enabled,
then the driver looks for custom media types saved from a previous bidirectional communication
query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the driver.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
180
■
Unspecified
■
Plain
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
■
Transparency
■
Prepunched
■
Labels
■
Bond
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
■
Recycled
■
Color
■
Cardstock
■
Rough
■
Envelope
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray you selected in the Source is:
setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books with different media types using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in
the group box, along with the associated options:
■
Front Cover
■
First Page
■
Other Pages
■
Last Page
■
Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to
include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the
document.
The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
181
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options
The following are the Front Cover options:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Custom... button
to create custom paper sizes
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is:
setting, see the Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of
this chapter.
182
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
First Page
Use the First Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-7 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Custom... button
to create custom paper sizes
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
183
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfpHP LaserJet 9040/9050mfpHP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp accessories. Any
optional media trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more
information about the Source is: setting, see the Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the other pages
of the document.
The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the
Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options
184
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
The following are the Other Pages options:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Custom... button
to create custom paper sizes
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
185
Figure 4-9 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Custom... button
to create custom paper sizes
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
186
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to
include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the
document.
The following illustration shows the Back Cover setting and options.
Figure 4-10 Back Cover setting
The following are the Back Cover options:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Custom... button
to create custom paper sizes
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
187
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page
would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
and Output tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking on the image.
Effects tab features
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following
illustration shows the Effects tab.
188
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-11 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Resizing Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this guide.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
189
Resizing options
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
■
Actual Size (default)
■
Print Document On setting
■
Scale to Fit option
■
% of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Select the Print Document On radio button to format the document for one media size and then
print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media
size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■
The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
■
The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you
can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media
source and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale
to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or
enlarged to fit on the selected media size.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit
the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If
the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered
at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the
document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following
illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print
Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
Figure 4-12 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
190
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target
size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in
relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The
default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media
size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the
software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by
the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are
adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key
is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the
upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator
is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar
arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the
scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows
resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value, and then use the scroll bar
arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
■
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects,,
Finishing, and, Output tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking the document preview image.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text
only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
■
(none)
■
Confidential
■
Draft
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
191
■
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default
setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of
the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is
"(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
Figure 4-13 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However,
clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then
select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are
saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
192
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in
the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark
Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A
warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if
you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one
time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change
the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size.
When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example,
Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in
the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on
the page. The settings are Diagonal, Horizontal, or Angle (custom). The default is Diagonal. All
three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular
setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that
spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page. Horizontal places the text along a line that
spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. Angle places the text at the specified angle
across the page.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls.
■
Name drop-down menu
■
Shading drop-down menu
■
Size spin box
■
Style drop-down menu
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
193
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is
language-dependent.
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains a single setting: Gray.
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu.
■
Lightest
■
Very Light (default)
■
Light
■
Medium Light
■
Medium
■
Medium Dark
■
Dark
■
Very Dark
■
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. A choice of Light produces a lightly
saturated gray watermark. A choice of Lightest produces the lightest shade of watermark; Darkest
produces a black watermark.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style dropdown menu.
Style
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points,
and Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Very Light shading,
and Bold style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and varies.
Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows
the Finishing tab.
194
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-14 Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Document Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Orientation group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this guide.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
195
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
■
Print on Both Sides check box
■
Flip Pages Up option
■
Booklet Layout drop-down menu
■
Pages per Sheet drop-down menu
■
Print Page Borders check box
■
Page Order drop-down menu
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
■
Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any type except: Transparency, Labels, or Envelope.
■
Size is: is set to any size except: Double Japan Postcard Rotated, Envelope #10, Envelope
B5, Envelope C5, Envelope DL, Envelope Monarch, or Statement.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet when the Print on Both Sides option
is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp comes with a duplexing unit installed.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases
printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job
from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the
driver.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed
on both sides, such as labels and transparencies, and the following media types:
■
Prepunched
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to
make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the
printer to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with
the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different
print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing
unit is used.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip
Pages Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, The
196
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation
selected on the Finishing tab.
Table 4-3 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Landscape
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral
binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner
appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back
side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they
were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down
menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media
size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab.
■
Left Edge Binding
■
Right Edge Binding
When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes
to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it
automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Printing a Booklet section of
this chapter for more information.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other
Pages, Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select
the Use Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other
pages, and back cover.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
197
Printing a Booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1
Click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2
Click the Finishing tab and select the Print on Both Sides check box.
3
In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for
example, Right Edge Binding).
4
Click OK in the print driver.
5
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Printing a Book
You can print a book with different media types for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page,
and back cover. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features of this chapter.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single
sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and
are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet
drop-down menu provides six settings:
■
1 page per sheet (this is the default)
■
2 pages per sheet
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
NOTE When you select an option other than 2 pages per sheet, booklet printing is
unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define
the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
198
■
Right, then Down
■
Down, then Right
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
■
Left, then Down
■
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the
examples in the following illustration.
Figure 4-15 Page-order preview images
■
2 pages per sheet
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
and Output tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking the document preview image.
Rotate
Select this feature to rotate the document image on the media 180 degrees. For example, if the
return address on an envelope is smudged, try this setting and feed the envelope so the return
address area feeds into the printer first.
Output tab features
Use the Output tab to select finishing and output options for a document. The following illustration
shows the Output tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
199
Figure 4-16 Output tab
The Output tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Document preview image
■
Output Bin Options group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this guide.
200
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
and Output tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking the document preview image.
Output Bin Options
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp comes with several output device options. The available Output Bin
Options depend on which accessory output device is installed on the product. The options for
accessories, which must be installed and configured on the Device Settings tab, are:
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Mailbox Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Stacker Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Job Separator Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox – Sorter/Collator Mode
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
■
HP Multifunction Finisher
When no optional output device accessories are installed on the product, the standard Output Bin
Options are:
■
Automatically Select
■
Left Output Bin (Straightest Path)
Job Storage tab features
Use the Job Storage feature to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp memory for printing
at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory,
install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage
features. "Proof and Hold" and "Private Job" Job Storage modes are available when 48 MB or more
RAM is installed.
When a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the
changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update
Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Automatic
Configuration in this chapter.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
201
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1
Click Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP
Professional) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home)
2
Right-click the product name, click Properties, and then click the Device Settings tab.
3
If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and
then select either 128 MB, 256 MB, 384 MB, or 512 MB, depending on the total amount of
memory currently installed.
4
If a hard disk has been installed, select Printer Hard Disk: under Installable Options, and then
select Installed in the drop-down menu.
5
Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available.
NOTE You can disable Job Storage while leaving the product hard disk enabled. To disable
Job Storage, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers
and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other
Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, click Properties, click
the Device Settings tab, select Job Storage:, and then select Disabled in the Change 'Job
Storage' Setting dialog box that appears. When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage
driver tab is not visible.
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
202
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-17 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Status group box (unlabeled)
■
Job Storage Mode group box
■
Require PIN group box
■
Job Notification Options group box
■
User Name group box
■
Job Name group box
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
203
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this guide.
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp to store documents at the
product and then control their printing at the product control panel. This feature is intended to provide
greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
■
Off
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
■
Quick Copy
■
Stored Job
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the
print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a
minimum total memory of 48 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining
copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that
can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If
more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second
proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing
job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
204
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu,
and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the
oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is
already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum
total memory of 48 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request
the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job
can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job
is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential
documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies
are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that
has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the
original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are
deleted if you turn off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You
must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled PIN is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the Private Job
option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If
you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four
characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four
digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN
contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed, and Job Storage must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the
product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The
number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control
panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu,
and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the
oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is
already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are
deleted if you turn off the product.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
205
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed, Job Storage must be enabled, and the
product must have a minimum total memory of 64 MB.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The
print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the
product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the
same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned
off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job
to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at
the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job
remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The private mode is
initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the
product control panel is required in order to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when
you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the
stored job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are
deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product
after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed. A hard disk is
required for Private stored jobs.
Require PIN
Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must enter the
4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN
number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must type the 4-digit
PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
Job notification
Clicking a job-storage mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as
well as the product name, port, and location.
206
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are
the User Name settings:
■
Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name is automatically displayed in the text field below the Windows User
Name options.
■
Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom option button, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field
can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because
the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character,
it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than
32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the
characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is
truncated.
Job Name
Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the control panel. The following
are the Job Name settings:
■
Automatic. This option automatically generates the job name associated with the stored print
job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the
software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
■
Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom
option button, the text field below the option becomes available.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0
through 9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a
lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII
code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field,
along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character
beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with Automatic. The
acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must
be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
If Job Name Exists
When you store a print job, you can create a print job name or the printer software can assign one
automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the
existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because
both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or
when one is created automatically, the printer software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the
end of the print job name to make the name unique. You can select Replace Existing File if you
always want the printer software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
207
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
Job Storage features.
2
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3
Click the Job Storage tab.
4
Select the Job Storage options described previously by clicking the appropriate option button,
and then complete any required fields.
5
Click OK.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print by
using the product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the select button.
PRINT JOB is highlighted.
5
Press the SELECT button.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the select button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the up and down buttons to select the number of copies to print.
8
Press the SELECT button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
208
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
5
Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the select button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the SELECT button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Properties tabs
The Properties tabs contain information about and options for configuring the product.
Device Settings
NOTE The Device Settings tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to
the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click
Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows NT 4.0 Home).
Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
Available options depend on the feature. The following illustration shows the Device Settings tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
209
Figure 4-18 Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
■
Form to Tray Assignment options
■
Font Substitution Table option
■
■
External Fonts option
Installable Options options
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input
tray.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form
(which defines the media size and margins) to each of your printer media sources. When a form is
matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to
which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
210
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Document Defaults driver tabs. This
constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional
accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options
setting. For example, for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, trays 1 and 4 are listed in both the Form to
Tray Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1
Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2
Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4
Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Cancel button to reconfigure all the
trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality
tab.
External Fonts
NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5
Unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts
can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Clicking the External Fonts option causes the Properties button to appear. Clicking the Properties
button opens the HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 4-19 HP Font Installer dialog box
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
211
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home).
2
Right-click the name of the product, and then click Properties.
3
Click the Device Settings tab.
4
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
5
Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
6
Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click
Browse to locate the file on your computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.
7
Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file
names appear in the Installed Font(s) window.
8
Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Removing external fonts
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home).
2
Right-click the name of the product, and then click Properties.
3
Click the Device Settings tab.
4
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
5
Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
6
The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window. Select the fonts that
you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.
7
Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product.
External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Clicking the Font Substitution Table option causes a list of fonts to appear, as show in the following
illustration. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.
212
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-20 Font Substitution Table
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings
The following controls are available and appear in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab:
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for
changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical
memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the Configuration
page. To print a Configuration page from the control panel, press the SELECT button (the one with the
check mark) to open the menus. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION,
and then press the SELECT button. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT
CONFIGURATION, and then press the SELECT button.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
213
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are
available:
■
ASCII (default)
■
TBCP
■
Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be
sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control
characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial
communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The
binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending
data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript
document. The default setting is No. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that
previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the
product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product
connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The
default setting is Yes. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs
are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is
connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No.
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in text to the gray provided by the
postscript driver. It is set to No by default.
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in graphics to the gray provided
by the postscript driver. It is set to No by default.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to augment the device fonts with the Euro currency character. It is set
to Yes by default.
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before
the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying
214
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the
computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints
an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase
this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300
seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts
as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type
3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option
on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin
box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType
fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an
outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send
TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in
Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp. The following controls are available:
■
Automatic Configuration
■
Tray 1
■
Tray 4
■
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
■
Accessory Output Bin
■
Printer Memory
■
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
■
Printer Hard Disk
■
Job Storage
■
Mopier Mode
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If
bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
215
Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an
automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is
unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
Tray 1
This control specifies whether you have Tray 1, an additional 100-sheet multipurpose tray, installed
on your product. The default setting is Installed.
Tray 4
This control specifies whether you have Tray 4, an additional 2000-sheet media tray, installed on
your product. The default setting is Installed.
Accessory Output Bin
This control specifies whether you have any accessory output devices installed on your product. The
available accessory output devices are:
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
■
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
■
HP Multifunction Finisher
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Mailbox Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Stacker Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Job Separator Mode
■
8-Bin Mailbox — Sorter/Collator Mode
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp comes with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled
(Installed) by default.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports smart duplexing. The product uses the
smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only
runs the pages through the duplexing unit if there is printable information on the second side
of the page.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept.
The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
When a minimum total memory of 48 MB is installed, the Stored Job option and the Mopier Mode
are enabled in the print driver. The Stored Job option allows you to store print jobs, and then print
them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed
feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
216
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript
passthough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript
driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some
programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript
information to the printer that cannot be controlled by the driver. Other programs might print using
these options without problems. Select Disabled and print your document again if you encounter
problems.
NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough may cause unexpected
application behavior.
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print
driver. The Job Storage option allow you to store print jobs, and then print them later from the
control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces
multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Job Storage
When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those
print jobs later at the control panel.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and
reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the printer once, and then storing it in the printer
hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are
printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which
eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier
Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.
When you use the HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, or PS Emulation Driver, mopying is performed in one of two
ways, either through the software or through the product hardware. When the mopier is enabled,
mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiple-page print job
is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language (PJL)
command directing the product to make the specified number of copies.
When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which can still be
performed by the driver through the software rather than the product hardware (the mopying path
that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy
print job sent with the mopier disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, since
the print job is sent through the network as many times as the number of copies selected.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. Mopying, the ability to
send original print jobs to the product, is performed by the print driver. Collating can be controlled by
either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and PS Emulation Unidriver features
217
the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to
Disabled.
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on
the Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count
option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make
sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column,
"Expected result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear.
Table 4-4 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
218
Mopier mode
Application collation
Driver collation
Expected result
Disabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Disabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
5
Installing Windows printing-system
components
Introduction
This chapter provides information about these topics:
■
Supported Windows operating systems
■
System requirements
■
Font support
■
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems
■
■
Introduction
■
Installing from the printing-system CD
■
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Detailed Windows installation
■
Typical Installation dialog box sequence
■
Custom Installation
■
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
■
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
■
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
Setting a default printer
219
Supported Windows operating systems
The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software supports the following Windows operating
systems:
■
Windows 98
■
Windows Me
■
Windows NT 4.0 (parallel and networked only)
■
Windows 2000 (32-bit)
■
Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)
■
Windows XP Professional (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows OS, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print
driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp has not been tested with and does not support the
Windows 3.1x or Windows 95 operating systems.
220
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
System requirements
The following list shows the system requirements for installing and using the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software on each of the supported operating systems:
■
Pentium® or compatible processor
■
Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640-by-480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
■
Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system
■
93 MB of available hard-disk space (on the same partition as the operating system) for full
installation
■
Onboard parallel port or network connection
System requirements
221
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts
that are available on the CD that came with the product.
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing
product:
■
Arial
■
Courier New Italic
■
Times New Roman Italic
■
Arial Italic
■
Courier New Bold
■
Times New Roman Bold
■
Arial Bold
■
Courier New Bold Italic
■
Times New Roman Bold Italic
■
Arial Bold Italic
■
Symbol
■
Wingdings
■
Courier New
■
Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a Typical Installation of the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software.
Table 5-1 Default fonts
222
File name
Font name
ALBR85W.TTF
Albertus Extra Bold
ALBR55W.TTF
Albertus Medium
AVGR45W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
AVGR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
AVGR65W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
AVGR66W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
BOKR35W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
Font support
File name
Font name
BOKR36W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light Italic
BOKR75W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi
BOKR76W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
OLVR55W.TTF
Antique Olive
OLVR75W.TTF
Antique Olive Bold
OLVR56W.TTF
Antique Olive Italic
CGOR45W.TTF
CG Omega
CGOR65W.TTF
CG Omega Bold
CGOR66W.TTF
CG Omega Bold Italic
CGOR46W.TTF
CG Omega Italic
CGTR45W.TTF
CG Times
CGTR65W.TTF
CG Times Bold
CGTR66W.TTF
CG Times Bold Italic
CGTR46W.TTF
CG Times Italic
CLAR67W.TTF
Clarendon Condensed Bold
CORONET.TTF
Coronet
CPSR45W.TTF
CourierPS
CPSR65W.TTF
CourierPS Bold
CPSR66W.TTF
CourierPS Bold Oblique
CPSR46W.TTF
CourierPS Oblique
GARR45W.TTF
Garamond
GARR65W.TTF
Garamond Bold
GARR46W.TTF
Garamond Italic
GARR66W.TTF
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
HELR45W.TTF
Helvetica®
HELR65W.TTF
Helvetica Bold
HELR66W.TTF
Helvetica Bold Oblique
HELR47W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
HELR67W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold
HELR68W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
HELR48W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
HELR46W.TTF
Helvetica Oblique
CHANC___.TTF
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
223
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
File name
Font name
DINGS___.TTF
ITC Zapf Dingbats
LETR45W.TTF
Letter Gothic
LETR65W.TTF
Letter Gothic Bold
LETR46W.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic
MARIGOLD.TTF
Marigold
NCSR75W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold
NCSR76W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
NCSR56W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Italic
NCSR55W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Roman
PALR65W.TTF
Palatino Bold
PALR66W.TTF
Palatino Bold Italic
PALR46W.TTF
Palatino Italic
PALR45W.TTF
Palatino Roman
SYMPS__.TTF
SymbolPS
TIMR65W.TTF
Times* Bold
TIMR66W.TTF
Times Bold Italic
TIMR46W.TTF
Times Italic
TIMR45W.TTF
Times Roman
UNVR65W.TTF
Univers Bold
UNVR66W.TTF
Univers Bold Italic
UNVR67W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold
UNVR68W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
UNVR57W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium
UNVR58W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
UNVR55W.TTF
Univers Medium
UNVR56W.TTF
Univers Medium Italic
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts
224
File name
Font name
PS_12639.TTF
Albertus MT
PS_12640.TTF
Albertus MT Italic
PS_14530.TTF
Albertus MT Light
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
Font support
File name
Font name
PS-11120.TTF
Antique Olive CompactPS
PS_11119.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
PS_11118.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Bold
PS_11846.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Italic
PS_24516.TTF
Apple Chancery Italic
PS_12704.TTF
Bodoni Poster
PS_14508.TTF
Bodoni PosterCompressed
PS_12581.TTF
BodoniPS
PS_12585.TTF
BodoniPS Bold
PS_12586.TTF
BodoniPS Bold Italic
PS_12582.TTF
BodoniPS Italic
PS_24517.TTF
Candid
PS_24518.TTF
Chicago
PS_14513.TTF
Clarendon Light
PS_10269.TTF
ClarendonPS
PS_12968.TTF
ClarendonPS Bold
PS_10369.TTF
Cooper Black
PS_10370.TTF
Cooper Black Italic
PS_14514.TTF
Copperplate32bc
PS_14515.TTF
Copperplate33bc
PS_10249.TTF
Coronet
PS_10267.TTF
Eurostile
PS_10268.TTF
Eurostile Bold
PS_14512.TTF
Eurostile Bold ExtendedTwo
PS_14511.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
PS_10267.TTF
Eurostile Medium
PS_24509.TTF
Geneva
PS_13872.TTF
GillSans
PS_13874.TTF
GillSans Bold
PS_13875.TTF
GillSans Bold Italic
PS_14053.TTF
GillSans Condensed
PS_14054.TTF
GillSans Condensed Bold
PS_14051.TTF
GillSans ExtraBold
PS_13873.TTF
GillSans Italic
225
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
226
File name
Font name
PS_13870.TTF
GillSans Light
PS_13871.TTF
GillSans Light Italic
PS_12542.TTF
Goudy
PS_12544.TTF
Goudy Bold
PS_10695.TTF
Goudy Bold Italic
PS_12545.TTF
Goudy ExtraBold
PS_12543.TTF
Goudy Italic
PS_14526.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
PS_14528.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold
PS_14529.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic
PS_14527.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Italic
PS_24519.TTF
Hoefler Text
PS_24521.TTF
Hoefler Text Black
PS_24522.TTF
Hoefler Text Black Italic
PS_24520.TTF
Hoefler Text Italic
PS_24523.TTF
Hoefler Text Ornaments
PS_14503.TTF
Joanna MT
PS_14505.TTF
Joanna MT Bold
PS_14506.TTF
Joanna MT Bold Italic
PS_14504.TTF
Joanna MT Italic
PS_13778.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic
PS_13777.TTF
Letter GothicPS
PS_13779.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold
PS_13780.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold Italic
PS_12675.TTF
Lubalin Graph
PS_12677.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold
PS_12625.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold Italic
PS_12623.TTF
Lubalin Graph Italic
PS_94073.TTF
Marigold
PS_14525.TTF
Mona Lisa Recut
PS_24524.TTF
Monaco
PS_24510.TTF
New York
PS_12506.TTF
Optima
PS_12510.TTF
Optima Bold
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
Font support
File name
Font name
PS_12511.TTF
Optima Bold Italic
PS_12507.TTF
Optima Italic
PS_14072.TTF
Oxford Italic
PS_11546.TTF
Stempel Garamond Roman Italic
PS_11545.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
PS_11547.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold
PS_11548.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic
PS_14507.TTF
Taffy
PS_13501.TTF
Univers 45 Light
PS_14023.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold
PS_14024.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold Italic
PS_13502.TTF
Univers 45 Light Italic
PS_14030.TTF
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold
PS_14040.TTF
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold Italic
PS_14021.TTF
Univers 55
PS_14022.TTF
Univers 55 Italic
PS_14029.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed
PS_14039.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed Italic
PS_13548.TTF
Univers Extended Italic
PS_13547.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
PS_14481.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic
PS_14480.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Italic
227
Installation instructions
The following sections provide instructions for installing the printer drivers on various Windows
operating systems.
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating
systems
General installation instructions are similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and
Windows XP operating systems.
NOTE For the Windows NT 4.0 operating system, the print drivers can be installed only by
using the Add Printer installation method. The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver are available on the printing-system software CD.
For more information, see the Installing print drivers by using Add Printer section in this
chapter.
If the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system
software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP
LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional
communication, some driver autoconfiguration methods, and the HP Toolbox are not available to the
client systems.
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are
necessary to install the software.
When the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is
always added to the system.
Installing from the printing-system CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing system from the CD that
came with your product.
1
Close all programs that are open on your computer.
2
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If your CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to
and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3
Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the
printing-system software file.
228
1
Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3
Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For
detailed installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation.
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can
choose to install the software by using either a typical installation or a custom installation.
Using the Back and Cancel buttons
Clicking the Back button on any installation dialog box returns you to the previous dialog box. The
specific dialog box depends on your previous selections.
To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any
installation dialog box.
1
Clicking the Cancel button opens a dialog box, prompting you with this question: “Are you sure
you want to cancel the installation?”
2
Clicking Yes opens a dialog box, stating that the setup was interrupted.
3
Clicking the Finish button opens the Cancel dialog box.
4
Clicking the Finish button closes the installation screens.
Other buttons appear on the installation dialog boxes:
■
Help
■
Next
■
Space
The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context below.
Modifying a pre-existing installation
If an HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of
the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install printer setting changes to modify
installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are
presented, depending on selections made.
Typical Installation dialog box sequence
NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Pro installation
sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.
The typical installation includes the following components:
■
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp PCL 6 driver
■
Screen fonts
The following illustration represents an overall path through the installation process. It is intended as
a reference only; selections and setups will vary.
Installation instructions
229
Figure 5-1 Installation path
NOTE The components of a typical installation might vary from product to product.
230
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-2 Choose Setup Language dialog box
When you select the Install Printer option from the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system
software CD, the Choose Setup Language dialog box appears.
NOTE The Choose Setup Language dialog box lists only the languages that are available
on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software CD.
The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this
selection as the default.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu.
Clicking OK initiates the printing system setup, and the Preparing to Install dialog box appears.
Figure 5-3 Preparing to Install dialog box
Installation instructions
231
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
NOTE If your computer uses the Windows NT 4.0 operating system, you must use the Add
Printer install method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp product. If you
try using the regular install method in a Windows NT 4.0 operating environment, the following
screen appears:
Figure 5-4 Use the Add Printer Wizard
For information about using the Add Printer install method, see the Installing print drivers by using
Add Printer section.
Figure 5-5 Welcome dialog box
Clicking Software License Agreement takes you to the HP Software License Agreement dialog
box.
232
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Clicking Installation Notes opens the file LJ9050MFP_INSTALL_NOTE_ENWW.HTM
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Connection dialog box.
Figure 5-6 HP Software License Agreement dialog box
Clicking OK returns you to the Welcome dialog box.
Installation instructions
233
Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box
NOTE The product does not support infrared connections.
If you select Connected directly to this computer (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable or
universal serial bus cable), clicking Next takes you to the Connector Type dialog box, and then to
the Model dialog box. This is the default option.
The Model dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
234
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-8 Model dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box. To continue with the default installation
sequence, see Figure 5-19 Installation Type dialog box.
If you select Connected via the network in the Printer Connection dialog box, clicking next takes
you to the Network Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
235
Figure 5-9 Network Setup dialog box
If you select Basic network setup for a PC or server, clicking Next takes you to the Identify
Printer dialog box. This is the default selection.
If you select Client setup for client-server printing, clicking Next initiates a series of question
dialog boxes that help you determine the best connection-type option to follow. This series begins
with the Specify Network dialog box.
If you select Help me determine which setup is right for me, clicking Next takes you to the
Connection Type dialog box.
236
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-10 Connection Type dialog box
Clicking Parallel Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Cable Connection dialog box.
Clicking USB Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Cable Connection dialog box.
Clicking Network Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Print Job Management dialog box.
Installation instructions
237
Figure 5-11 Cable Connection dialog box
Clicking A Jetdirect Print Server and then clicking Next takes you to the Print Job Management
dialog box.
Clicking Another PC (not this PC) and then clicking Next takes you to the Recommended Network
Setup dialog box.
238
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-12 Print Job Management dialog box
Clicking either selection and then clicking Next takes you to the Recommended Network Setup
dialog box.
Installation instructions
239
Figure 5-13 Recommended Network Setup dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Identify Printer dialog box.
240
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-14 Identify Printer dialog box
Clicking Search from a list of detected printers (recommended) and then clicking Next opens a
screen that states that the installer is searching the network for available products to install.
If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Check Cable Connection
dialog box appears, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the
option of searching again or specifying a printer by address.
If a printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have
been found on the network.
Clicking Specify a printer by address and then clicking Next takes you to the Specify Printer
dialog box.
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Installation instructions
241
Figure 5-15 Specify Printer dialog box
You can specify a printer by selecting one of the following options and typing in the required
information:
■
Hardware Address (MAC)
■
IP Address
■
IP Hostname
■
IPX Address
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Next opens the Searching dialog box. Clicking Stop on this screen stops the searching
process. When the search is finished, the Printer Found dialog box opens, as shown in the following
illustration.
242
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-16 Printer Found dialog box
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Selecting Yes, install this printer and then clicking Next takes you to the Confirm Settings dialog
box.
Clicking No, install a different printer and then clicking Next takes you to theCheck Cable
Connection dialog box, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you
the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address.
The Confirm Settings dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Installation instructions
243
Figure 5-17 Confirm Settings dialog box
Clicking Change TCP/IP Settings takes you to the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box, and then
on to the Set Network Protocol dialog box.
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box.
244
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-18 Set Network Protocol dialog box
Clicking Change Settings... makes the text boxes active so that you can type a different IP Address,
Subnet Mask, or Gateway address.
Clicking Next takes you to the Confirm Settings dialog box and then to the Installation Type dialog
box.
Installation instructions
245
Figure 5-19 Installation Type dialog box
NOTE The components of a Typical Installation might vary from product to product.
Clicking Typical Installation (Recommended) and then clicking Next, takes you to the Printer
Name dialog box.
Clicking Custom Installation and then clicking Next, takes you to the Features dialog box.
246
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-20 Features dialog box
A red X in the icon indicates that the feature is not installed. The installed icon appears when you
select an install state for that feature.
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Space opens the Disk Space Requirements dialog box, which shows the amount of
available space on your hard drive and advises you if there is not enough space for the features you
have selected.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Name dialog box.
Installation instructions
247
Figure 5-21 Printer Name dialog box
Selecting the Use this printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box
sets the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp as your default printer.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Sharing dialog box.
248
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-22 Printer Sharing dialog box
NOTE The Printer Sharing dialog box does not appear if your computer is running
Windows 98 or Windows Me.
Clicking Not shared and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog
box.
Clicking Share as: makes the text box available. Typing the share name and then clicking Next
takes you to the Client Driver and Support dialog box.
NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you
share the printer onWindows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
operating systems by selecting Share as, you must type a name. You can also provide
additional print driver support for other operating systems.
Installation instructions
249
Figure 5-23 Client Driver Support dialog box
The Client Driver Support dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or
Windows Me. In Windows XP, you can select the check box to install drivers for Windows 95,
Windows 98, or Windows Me systems that share the network printer.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
250
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-24 Printer Location and Comment dialog box
In the Location text box, you can type the physical location of the printer.
In the Comment text box, you can type any additional information that might be helpful to users.
Clicking Next takes you to the Ready to Install dialog box.
Installation instructions
251
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box
Clicking Install starts the installation process.
When installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration.
252
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-26 Finish dialog box
Custom Installation
The Custom Installation gives you the option of installing the following components:
■
hp LaserJet 9040/9050mfp PCL 6 Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
■
hp LaserJet 9040/9050mfp PS Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
■
hp LaserJet toolbox
■
Screen Fonts
■
Install Notes
■
User Guide
Installation instructions
253
Figure 5-27 Features dialog box, Custom Installation
NOTE The features available in a Custom Installation might vary from product to product.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 computers running
a terminal server do not support the HP Toolbox option.
The appearance of the Features dialog box might vary, depending on the product and the
connection type.
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:
1
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2
Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, and then click Printers and Faxes. The Printers
and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
In Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop,
click Settings, click Printers and Faxes and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard
screen appears.
3
254
Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a
part of this process.
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows OS, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print
driver. 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a
print driver by using the Add Printer feature.
1
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2
Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes and then click Add a
printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3
Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as
a part of this process.
4
Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the following files on the software CD:
To install the PCL 6 driver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6
\hpc90xmd.inf
To install the PCL 5 driver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5
\hpc90xmd.inf
To install the PS driver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc90xmd.inf
5
Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start
the utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser.
Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any
of the following selections:
■
Language
■
Operating system
■
Print drivers
■
Components
NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device
Installer Customization Wizard. This document (CUSTOMIZATIONDOC.RTF) is available on
the printing-system software CD at the root of the <language> folder.
Running the Installer Customization Wizard
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file
(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple
systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be edited for
system configuration differences directly in the RESPONSE.INI file. The Installer HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard, available on the printing-system software CD at the root of the <language>
folder, provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file.
Installation instructions
255
To run the Installer Customization Wizard
1
Insert the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2
In the CD browser main screen, click installer customization wizard.
3
Choose the setup language you wish to use. The installer automatically detects the language
that your computer system uses and presents this selection as the default. Click OK to continue.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the
drop-down menu.
The Installer Customization Wizard starts automatically. To complete the installation, follow the
instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following section.
Dialogs
The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be launched from the CD browser,
depending on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from MSI with its own interface.
The Choose Setup Language dialog box, the InstallShield Wizard dialog box, and the Preparing
to Install dialog box appear the same as they appear in the standard installer. After these dialog
boxes, the Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box appears.
Figure 5-28 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Language dialog box.
256
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-29 Language dialog box
NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language
that is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance Mode on systems where installation
has been completed using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the
language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard
installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be
installed to restore the option to install other languages.
The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the
text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Choose a language dialog box earlier). The Language
dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Choose a language dialog box, but any
language (that is available on the CD) can be chosen for the customized installer. The language
choice is recorded in the response file.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Port dialog box.
Clicking Back returns you to the Welcome dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
257
Figure 5-30 Printer Port dialog box
Clicking Queue Name\Path makes a text field available for a Queue name entry. Click the Browse
button and navigate to a printer to record the path.
Clicking Local Port and then clicking Next takes you to the Connector Type dialog box, which is
similar to the Connection Type dialog box that appears during a standard installation. However, the
Connector Type dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. It also
includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network
port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where the port
will be used.
Clicking New TCP/IP Port or New IPX Port, and then clicking Next, takes you to the Specify Printer
dialog box.
Clicking Back returns you to the Language dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
258
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-31 Specify Printer dialog box
Clicking IP Address: makes a field available for typing the IP address for the printer. Only numerals
are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, at least one digit must be typed in the IP Address
field to prevent an error message from appearing, asking for a valid IP address.
Clicking IP Hostname: makes a field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any
characters are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field.
If this option is selected, at least one character must be typed in the IP Hostname field to prevent an
error message from appearing, asking for a valid IP hostname.
Clicking IPX Address: makes a field available for typing the IPX address of the printer.
Clicking Hardware Address: makes a field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It
accepts any characters but limits the entry to 13 characters.
Clicking Back takes you to the previous dialog box, based on your previous selections.
Clicking any of the options and then clicking Next takes you to the Model dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
NOTE The Installer Customization Wizard does not validate that the printer or any of the
printer identification entries actually exist on the network, because the customized installer
can be used on a separate network.
Installation instructions
259
Figure 5-32 Model dialog box
After the identification or port setup dialog boxes are completed, the Model dialog box appears.
The model selection can affect which features are available for the installation. It can also affect
driver defaults depending on the product-specific instantiation.
Clicking Next takes you to the Features dialog box.
Clicking Back takes you to the Printer Port, Connection Type, or Specify Printer dialog box,
depending on your previous selections.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
260
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-33 Features dialog box
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other feature
selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver.
Clicking Next takes you to the Driver Configuration dialog box.
Clicking Back takes you to the Model dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
261
Figure 5-34 Driver Configuration dialog box
It is possible to supply a preconfigured driver in the customized installer if the driver supports it. You
can use the preconfigured driver to place default settings on the printer that is installed. If a driver
that supports this feature is selected in the Features dialog box, the Driver Configuration dialog
box appears.
Clicking Yes and then clicking Next opens a list of all printing preferences and device options for the
product.
Clicking No and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer Name dialog box.
Clicking Back takes you to the Features dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
262
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-35 Driver Configuration preconfigure driver dialog box
Any setting in this dialog box, including those on the Device Settings tab, can be preset before the
printer is installed (subject to normal driver constraints).
Clicking Next opens either the Preconfigure Printer dialog box for another driver that supports
preconfiguration (if any), or the Printer Name dialog box.
Clicking Back takes you to the previous Driver Configuration dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
263
Figure 5-36 Printer Name dialog box
The Default Printer: drop-down menu lists only those drivers that are selected in the Features
dialog box.
Clicking Next opens the Printer Sharing dialog box.
Clicking Back takes you to the previous Driver Configuration dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
264
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-37 Printer Sharing dialog box
Clicking Share as: opens a field for naming the product as it will appear on the network.
Clicking Next with Not Shared selected takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Clicking Share as: and then clicking Next takes you to the Client Driver Support dialog box.
Clicking Back takes you to the Printer Name dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
265
Figure 5-38 Client Driver Support dialog box
NOTE This dialog box provides options for selecting OS-specific drivers to add to the
installation to provide for Point and Print driver vending on the system. Either or both optional
drivers can be selected.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Clicking Back takes you to the Printer Sharing dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
266
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-39 Printer Location and Comment support dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is
limited to 241 characters.
Use the Comment: text field to type any other helpful text such as capabilities about the printer. The
field is limited to 241 characters.
Clicking Back takes you to the Printer Sharing or the Client Driver Support dialog box, depending
on your previous selection.
Clicking Next takes you to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
267
Figure 5-40 Custom Installer Location dialog box
NOTE The location for the installer package defaults to the drive that the system user
opened last.
Clicking Change opens the Change Current Destination Folder dialog box to navigate to the drive
that you want.
Clicking Back takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Clicking Install after you have specified a location (or browsed to a location) starts the file copy
process and takes you to the Installing dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
268
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-41 Change Current Destination Folder dialog box
NOTE Several files including system files will be placed at the root of the directory that
appears in the Folder Name field. These files collectively occupy approximately 37 MB on the
directory. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing.
Click the New Folder icon to create a new folder.
After you select a location, click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box. The
location appears in the Folder name field.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
269
Figure 5-42 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar reaches the end.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
270
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-43 Finish dialog box
Clicking Finish closes the Finish dialog box and exits the Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and chosen options, you will or will not be
presented with some additional steps once you click Finish.
Distribution
The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD,
except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected.
The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method
is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to
run the installation without being prompted.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
■
customized silent installer
■
command-line silent installer
The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The
name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer
package.
The command-line silent installer method cannot be customized by end users. It installs only the
printing-system components that are included in the Typical Installation. For more information, see
the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard. This document
(CUSTOMIZATION_README_XXWW.RTF) is available on the printing-system software CD at the
root of the <language> folder.
Installation instructions
271
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server
2003
The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print
function when you cannot see the product on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step
is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server
from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these
procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a
function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor
types. Any other processor types must use Windows NT 4.0 drivers from Microsoft.
To install the print driver on a Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 OS, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the
Windows NT 4.0 print driver on the Windows NT 4.0 server (or the Windows 2000 print driver on the
Windows 2000 server), you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows NT 4.0
Printer .INF file (or the Windows 2000 Printer .INF file) must contain the same product name as the
Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF file.
Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or
Windows Me PS Driver Version 4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers running
the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the
clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the
server.
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on
different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print
driver that is different from the one on the print server.
With Windows NT 4.0, print drivers executed in kernel mode. A kernel mode process runs in a
specially privileged part of the operating system that gives the process access to all of the system
resources. Consequently, a misbehaving driver can cause serious system stability problems,
including operating system crashes.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with
Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode
processes. User-mode drivers execute in a protected part of the operating system just like all of the
normal end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that misbehaves is
capable of crashing only the process in which it is running, and cannot crash the whole operating
system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability
is increased.
272
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
1
In Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows 2000 OSs, click Start, click
Settings, and then click Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click
Control Panel, click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other
hardware devices (Windows XP Home).
2
Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.
3
Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
Installation instructions
273
274
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
6
Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and
Unix operating systems
Introduction
This chapter provides system requirements and procedures for installing and removing the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing-system software for supported operating systems other than
Windows. It also provides information about font support and system modifications. The following
operating systems are supported:
Introduction
■
Macintosh
■
Linux
■
Unix
275
System requirements
The following are system requirements for installing and using the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp
printing-system software on each of these supported operating systems.
Macintosh
■
PowerPC processor
■
Macintosh OS 9.x or later or Mac OS X (Version 10.1 or later)
■
256 MB RAM
■
110 MB available disk space
Linux
For information about Linux support for the product, see the HP Linux Web site:
■
http://www.hp.com/go/linux.
UNIX
For information about UNIX support for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, see the following Web site:
■
276
http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
Macintosh
The following sections contain information about using HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp printing software
for the Macintosh OS.
Macintosh component descriptions
The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
■
PPDs for Mac OS 9.x and Mac OS X (10.1 and later)
■
PDEs for Mac OS X only (10.1 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS 9.x, postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp are
installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the System
folder. In Mac OS X, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/
Resources:<lang>.lproj where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer
to communicate with the product. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the printingsystem software CD.
For Mac OS 9.x, the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver must be installed to use the PPD file. Use the Apple
LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh. For Mac OS X, use Print Center to print.
PDEs
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X only, 10.1 and later) that provide
access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a series of Web pages and supporting Windows-based and Macintosh-based
software programs (for Mac OS X only, 10.2 and later). The HP Toolbox provides links to product
status information and enables you to receive alerts for product events.
For more information about the HP Toolbox, see the HP Toolboxsection of this guide.
HP Embedded Web Server
Macintosh OS 9.x operating systems support the HP EWS. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control
features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks:
Macintosh
■
Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.
■
Set a password for the product.
■
From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see
the printing software help).
277
Install notes
This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the
printing-system software, and technical assistance.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with Mac
OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in
the Macintosh OS Help Center.
Screen fonts
These screen fonts are available only for Macintosh computers and Macintosh-compatible computers
(Mac OS Classic only). Because the screen fonts match your printing fonts, you can see onscreen
how your printed page looks.
Font support
To ensure that you can use all of the installed fonts with the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, the
Macintosh printing system includes the standard 35 screen fonts in 11 families:
■
Avant Garde
■
Helvetica Narrow
■
Times
■
Bookman
■
New Century Schoolbook
■
Zapf Chancery
■
Courier
■
Palatino
■
Zapf Dingbats
■
Helvetica
■
Symbol
The Macintosh printing system also includes the HP 45 XPS font families:
278
■
Clarendon Condensed Bold
■
Symbol
■
Albertus Medium
■
Coronet
■
Times New Roman
■
Antique Olive
■
Courier
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
■
Univers
■
Arial
■
Garamond
■
Univers Condensed
■
CG Omega
■
Letter Gothic
■
Wingdings
■
CG Times
■
Marigold
The following bitmap screen fonts reside on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp:
Macintosh
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
■
Helvetica
■
Palatino
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
■
Helvetica Bold
■
Palatino Bold
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
■
Helvetica Bold Oblique
■
Palatino Bold Italic
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
■
Helvetica Oblique
■
Palatino Italic
■
ITC Bookman Demi
■
Helvetica Narrow
■
Symbol
■
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
■
Helvetica Narrow Bold
■
Times Bold
■
ITC Bookman Light
■
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
■
Times Bold Italic
279
■
ITC Bookman Light Italic
■
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
■
Times Italic
■
Courier
■
New Century Schoolbook Bold
■
Times Roman
■
Courier Bold
■
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
■
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
■
Courier Bold Oblique
■
New Century Schoolbook Italic
■
ITC Zapf Dingbats
■
Courier Oblique
■
New Century Schoolbook Roman
The following fonts reside on the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp, but can be used by Macintosh
platforms only if you install additional screen fonts. You can either use these screen fonts directly
from the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp software CD or obtain them from the following Web site:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp_software or http://www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp_software.
280
■
Albertus Extra Bold
■
CG Times Italic
■
Marigold
■
Albertus Medium
■
Clarendon Condensed Bold
■
Symbol
■
Antique Olive
■
Coronet
■
Times New Roman
■
Antique Olive Bold
■
Courier
■
Times New Roman Bold
■
Antique Olive Italic
■
Courier Bold
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
Macintosh
■
Times New Roman Bold Italic
■
Arial Courier Bold Oblique
■
Times New Roman Italic
■
Arial Bold
■
Courier Italic
■
Univers Bold
■
Arial Bold Italic
■
Garamond Antiqua
■
Univers Bold Italic
■
Arial Italic
■
Garamond Halbfett
■
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
■
CG Omega
■
Garamond Kursiv
■
Univers Condensed Medium
■
CG Omega Bold
■
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
■
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
■
CG Omega Bold Italic
■
Letter Gothic
■
Univers Medium
■
CG Omega Italic
■
Letter Gothic Bold
■
Univers Medium Italic
■
CG Times
■
Letter Gothic Italic
■
Univers Italic
■
CG Times Bold
■
CG Times Bold Italic
■
Wingdings
■
CG Times Bold Italic
281
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh-compatible computer, the installation procedures are the same for a network
administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has
access rights to the printer.
NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk
connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct
connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp,
connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed.
Macintosh OS systems do not support parallel connections. You can use a cross-over
Ethernet cable for a direct connection to a computer running the Macintosh OS.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate
language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that
language.
NOTE Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS Classic installation or Mac OS X
installation.
To install the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS
1
Insert the CD that came with the Macintosh printing-system software into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet
9040/9050mfp CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
2
Open the HP LaserJet Installers folder. Find the Installer icon for the appropriate language.
Double-click the Installer icon to launch the Installer. In the opening dialog, click Continue.
NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "Admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog box (OS X, versions 10.1 and later only).
3
The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to
complete the software installation.
NOTE If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system,
please be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1
minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
4
When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select one of the following options to finish
setting up your product:
●
Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9.x
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X
To set up an AppleTalk networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x
282
1
Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu.
2
Click LaserWriter 8 on the left side of the Chooser dialog box.
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
3
Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.
4
Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box,
and then click Create.
To set up a Printer with Mac OS X
1
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Print Center.
2
Click Add (in Mac OS X 10.2) or Add Printer (in Mac OS X 10.1).
3
From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for your product.
4
Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your product.
For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select your product zone; or if you are
using IP Printing, type in an IP address.
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a PPD file, click
the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the PPD file you want to add.
5
Click Add.
6
To configure installable options in Mac OS X 10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional
paper trays, click the appropriate product icon in the Print Center Printer List window. Select
Show Info from the Printers menu, and then select the appropriate options from the Installable
Options popup menu.
7
Configure the options, and then click Apply Changes.
To set up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x
1
Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2
Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK.
3
Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.
4
Click the appropriate IP address and Queue, and then click OK.
5
Click Change and scroll through the list of products.
6
Click the correct product, and then click Select.
7
Click Create.
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash.
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh Printing System consists of two files: the HP LaserJet Installer - Integrated installer
program and an HP Toolbox installer program.
Macintosh
283
Mac OS Classic installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
Classic.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This subsection provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the
Easy Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 6-1 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Click Continue to open the dialog box.
Figure 6-2 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
284
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
You can also select the Custom Install option from the drop-down menu at the upper left. Easy
Install is the default.
Click Read Me to open the Installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
NOTE A Read Me... button appears on each Macintosh installation screen.
Figure 6-3 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
Select which of the available components to install by using the check boxes in the list.
Click Read Me to open the Installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Macintosh
285
Figure 6-4 Installing dialog box
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the
installation. Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
Figure 6-5 Installation was successful dialog box
Click Quit to exit the Installer. The Printer Setup Assistant opens.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for the HP Screen Font
Installer.
Figure 6-6 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog box
Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts dialog box.
286
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
Figure 6-7 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog box (1 of 2)
Click Install to start the installation.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
When you click Install, an installation progress bar dialog box briefly appears. Click Stop to interrupt
the install file copy process.
Figure 6-8 Installation was successful dialog box
Click Quit to exit the Installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer.
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
X operating system.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy
Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 6-9 Installer CD-ROM icon
If the CD screen does not open automatically, when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, doubleclick the hp LaserJet 9040/9050mfp CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.
Macintosh
287
In the hp LaserJet 9040/9050mfp folder, double-click the hp LaserJet Installers folder to open it.
In the hp LaserJet Installers folder, double-click the installer icon for the language you want to use.
This begins the install process.
When you run the installer you might first see the Authenticate dialog box (OS X, versions 10.1 and
later only).
Figure 6-10 Authenticate dialog box
Enter the correct password and click OK to continue. The install splash screen appears.
Figure 6-11 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Click Continue The License dialog box appears.
288
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
Figure 6-12 License dialog box
Click Print... to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the
license agreement.
Click Save As... to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.
Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.
Click Accept to continue the installation. The HP LaserJet Installer dialog box appears.
Macintosh
289
Figure 6-13 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click the Install
Location drop-down menu to specify a location.
You can also select a Custom Install option from the drop-down menu at upper left (shown in the
following illustration).
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Figure 6-14 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Select the install location using the Install Location drop-down menu (if the desired location is
different from "Macintosh HD").
290
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
Select the components that you want to install by using the check boxes in the list.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Figure 6-15 Install verification dialog box
Before the installation begins, a verification dialog box appears. It verifies what will be installed and
lists the additional steps that will need to be take to install the printer. Click OK to continue.
Figure 6-16 Installing dialog box
The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop
the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
When installation is complete, a popup message appears stating that the installation was successful.
Figure 6-17 Installation success message
Click Quit to exit the installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
Macintosh
291
292
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and Unix operating systems
7
Engineering Detail
Introduction
This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics:
Introduction
●
Media attributes
●
HP Toolbox
293
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
●
Media sources and destinations
●
Media-source commands
●
Media types and sizes
Media sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the
HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp:
Table 7-1 HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp media sources and destinations
Media sources
Media destinations
multipurpose tray (tray 1)
standard
500-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
standard
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)
standard
2000-sheet paper tray (tray 4)
standard
standard left bin
standard (not available when
accessory output device is attached)
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
optional
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
optional
HP Multifunction Finisher
optional
8-Bin Mailbox
optional
Media-source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the
command for tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l8H is the command for tray 4.
Table 7-2 Media-source commands
Media source
294
PCL 6
PCL 5
PostScript
ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource1
Esc&l#H
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true | false
or null
Tray 1 (100-sheet)
3
4
3 false
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
4
1
0 false
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
5
5
1 false
7
Engineering Detail
Table 7-2 Media-source commands (continued)
Media source
PCL 6
PCL 5
PostScript
ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource1
Esc&l#H
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true | false
or null
Tray 4 (2000-sheet)
8
20
5 false
Auto Select
1
7
NA
Manual feed in tray 1
2
2
3 true
For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY5"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for Tray 5.
1
Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and mediahandling constraints for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp.
Driver features and attributes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: dropdown menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating
system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 7-3 Supported features and attributes by driver
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6 2
Letter
216 mm
279 mm
"LETTER"
(8.5 inches)
(11.0 inches)
215.9 mm
139.7 mm
(8.5 inches)
(5.5 inches)
280 mm
431 mm
(11.0 inches)
(17.0 inches)
197 mm
273 mm
(7.75 inches)
(10.75 inches)
216 mm
330 mm
(8.5 inches)
(13 inches)
304.8 mm
457.2 mm
(12 inches)
(18 inches)
274 mm
393 mm
(10.75 inches)
(15.50 inches)
297 mm
420 mm
(11.69 inches)
(16.54 inches)
Statement
11 x 17
16K
8.5 x 13
12 x 18
8K
A3
Media attributes
"STATEMENT"
"LEDGER"
"ROC16K"
"8.5x13"
"12x18"
"ROC8K"
"A3"
295
Table 7-3 Supported features and attributes by driver (continued)
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6 2
A4
210 mm
297 mm
"A4"
(8.27 inches)
(11.69 inches)
148 mm
210 mm
(5.83 inches)
(8.27 inches)
305 mm
430 mm
(12.01 inches)
(16.93 inches)
257 mm
364 mm
(10.12 inches)
(14.33 inches)
182 mm
257 mm
(7.17 inches)
(10.12 inches)
148 mm
200 mm
(5.83 inches)
(7.87 inches)
105 mm
241 mm
(4.13 inches)
(9.5 inches)
176 mm
250 mm
(6.93 inches)
(9.84 inches)
162 mm
229 mm
(6.38 inches)
(9.02 inches)
110 mm
220 mm
(4.33 inches)
(8.66 inches)
99 mm
190 mm
(3.88 inches)
(7.5 inches)
185 mm
266 mm
(7.25 inches)
(10.5 inches)
216 mm
330 mm
(8.5 inches)
(12.99 inches)
216 mm
355 mm
(8.5 inches)
(14.0 inches)
Minimum:
Minimum:
98 mm
191 mm
(3.86 inches)
(7.5 inches)
Maximum:
Maximum:
312 mm
470 mm
A5
RA3
B4 (JIS)
B5 (JIS)
Double Japan Postcard
Rotated
Envelope #10
Envelope B5
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Envelope Monarch
Executive
Executive (JIS)
Legal
Custom
296
"A5"
"RA3"
"JIS B4"
"JIS B5"
“Double Postcard (JIS)”
"COM10"
"B5 ENV"
"C5"
"DL"
"MONARCH"
"EXEC"
"JISEXEC"
"LEGAL"
4
7
Engineering Detail
Table 7-3 Supported features and attributes by driver (continued)
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
(12.28 inches)
(18.5 inches)
PCL 6 2
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0
9.0 CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."
1
2
4
Table 7-4 Supported input media types
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (2000sheet)
Duplexing unit
Plain
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Preprinted
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Letterhead
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Transparency
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Prepunched
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Labels
Y
N
N
N
N
Bond
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Recycled
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Color
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Cardstock1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Rough
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Envelope
Y
N
N
N
N
1
Tray 1 accepts cardstock between 164 g/m2 (45 lb.) and 200 g/m2 (53 lb.).
Custom paper sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP LaserJet 9040/9050mfp:
Table 7-5 Custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Width
98 mm (3.86 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
190 mm (7.5 inches)
470.0 mm (18.5 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17.01 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
432 mm (17.01 inches)
Width
182.0 mm (7.17 inches)
297 mm (11.69 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
432 mm (17.01 inches)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (500-sheet)
Media attributes
297
Table 7-5 Custom media sizes (continued)
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Duplexing unit
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
312 mm (12.28 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.27 inches)
470 mm (18.5 inches)
Media-type commands
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of
characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5
letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-6 Media-type commands
1
2
298
Esc&
n#
Wd
Paper type
Esc&
6
Wd
Plain
Esc&
11
Wd
Preprinted
Esc&
11
Wd
Letterhead
Esc&
13
Wd
Transparency1
Esc&
11
Wd
Prepunched
Esc&
7
Wd
Labels
Esc&
5
Wd
Bond
Esc&
9
Wd
Recycled
Esc&
6
Wd
Color
Esc&
11
Wd
Cardstock2
Esc&
6
Wd
Rough
Esc&
9
Wd
Envelope
You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".
7
Engineering Detail
HP Toolbox
This section presents engineering detail for the following topics:
■
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support
■
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support
The registry entry HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run, with the value
HP Status controls the HP Toolbox. This entry runs HPSTATUS.EXE every time the system is
started. When you close the HP Toolbox by right-clicking the Toolbox tray icon and selecting Exit,
you are prompted to restart the HP Toolbox on startup. If you select No, don't start automatically,
this entry is removed.
To start status manually, select the Start|Run menu, and type HPSTATUS.
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems
The HP Toolbox must be uninstalled manually in a Macintosh OS. To uninstall the HP Toolbox
manually, follow these instructions:
1
Delete the following application:
Library/Startup Items/hp ToolboxStartup
NOTE The HP Toolbox cannot be uninstalled when it is in use. Because the HP Toolbox
runs at startup time, either quit the program before deleting it, or move it into the trash bin
and restart the computer.
2
Delete the following file:
Applications/Utilities/hp toolbox.webloc 3
3
HP Toolbox
Navigate to the Library/Printers/hp/Utilities/folder, and delete all files that have "Toolbox" in the
name.
299
300
7
Engineering Detail
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 105
unidrivers 191
A
About button, PCL traditional
drivers 132
accessibility
documentation 13
drivers 75
accessories, automatic
configuration 12, 27
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Act) compliance 13
Add Printer installation 254
Add Printer wizard 28
address book 42
Adobe Acrobat Reader
installing 8
printing PDF files without 64
viewing documentation 12
Adobe Web site 144
Advanced Printing Features
setting, unidrivers 170
Advanced tab
PS Emulation Driver 145
unidrivers 167
Alerts tab, HP Toolbox 50
alerts, e-mail 36, 37
Alternative Letterhead Mode
PCL traditional drivers 141
unidrivers 170
alternative source support 80
Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) compliance 13
AppleTalk networks 282
application settings
traditional drivers 83
unidrivers 165
Index
ASCII output protocol, PS
Emulation Driver 160, 214
Automatic Configuration, unidrivers
215
autorun CD-ROM, Windows 7
B
Back button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 229
Back Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 117, 122
unidrivers 181, 187
Back to Front printing, unidrivers
171
Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers
130
bidirectional communication
about 27
driver support 72
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
28
binary output protocol, PS
Emulation Driver 160, 214
binding settings
PCL traditional drivers 92
unidrivers 196
bins
custom paper sizes 115, 179
driver support 74
PCL traditional drivers, options
102
PS Emulation Driver settings
149
unidriver settings 201
black, printing all text as
PCL traditional drivers 98, 99
unidrivers 171
booklet printing settings
PCL traditional drivers 93
unidrivers 197
Bubble help 86
bundle support 73
C
Cable Connection dialog box,
Windows 238
Cancel button, Windows
installation dialog boxes 229
cardstock, paper type commands
298
CD-ROM
documentation 8, 12
in-box file layout 16
installing Macintosh printingsystem software 282
installing Windows printingsystem software 6, 228
regional versions 17
Change Current Destination
Folder dialog box 269
CHM files, viewing 13
Choose Setup Language dialog
box, Windows 231
Client Driver Support dialog box,
Windows
Customization Wizard 266
Typical Installation 250
collation settings
PCL traditional drivers 137
PS Emulation Driver 150
unidrivers 169, 217
command-line printing
FTP, Windows 65
local port, Windows 66
LPR 69
Macintosh 68
networks, Windows 68
UNIX 68
Windows 64
301
command-line silent install for
Windows 271
commands, paper
size 297
source 294
type 298
common installer, features 8
Configuration Page, HP
Embedded Web Server 34
Configure Device page, HP
Embedded Web Server 36
Configure tab, PCL traditional
drivers 135
Confirm Settings dialog box,
Windows 244
Connection type dialog box,
Windows 237
connectivity
bidirectional communication
support 27
driver support 71
Network Setup dialog box,
Windows 236
Printer Connection dialog box,
Windows 234
constraint messages
PCL traditional drivers 86
unidrivers 167
context-sensitive help
PCL traditional drivers 86
PS Emulation Driver 144
unidrivers 167
control panel settings
traditional drivers 83
unidrivers 165
Copy Count settings
PCL traditional drivers 132
PS Emulation Driver 145
unidrivers 169, 217
covers, use different paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 117
unidrivers 181
Ctrl-D settings, PS Emulation
Driver 160, 214
Custom Installation 7, 253
Custom Installation dialog box,
Windows 254
Custom Installer Location dialog
box 268
custom paper sizes
302
PCL traditional drivers 112
PCL unidrivers 178
custom paper support 297
customer support 33
Customization Wizard 255
D
default Print Task Quick Sets
PCL traditional drivers 89
unidrivers 173
default printer, setting 273
deleting Job Storage jobs 208
destinations, paper 294
Device Information page, HP
Embedded Web Server 33, 36
Device Settings tab
PS Emulation Driver 157
unidrivers 209
Device Status page, HP
Embedded Web Server 33
dialog boxes, printing-system
software installation
Mac OS Classic 284
Mac OS X 287
Windows, Typical 229
Digital Sending Software (DSS) 54
Digital Sending tab, HP
Embedded Web Server 39
DIMMs, fonts
PCL Traditional Driver settings
139
unidriver settings 211
directory structure, software CDROM 16
disabling
driver features 31
HP Toolbox 299
disk space requirements
Macintosh and Linux 276
Windows 221
Document Options
PCL traditional drivers 91
PS Emulation Driver 147
unidrivers 170
document preview image 199
documentation
Help feature support 75
install notes 14
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, PCL traditional drivers
91
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, unidriver 175
viewing 8, 12
double-sided printing
PCL Traditional Driver settings
92
unidriver settings 196
downloading
firmware 55
printing-system software 22
Driver Configuration dialog box,
Customization Wizard 262
Driver Work Space (DWS) 141
drivers
accessibility support 75
accessory configuration 27
Add Printer installation 254
availability by operating system
23
bidirectional communication
support 72
bins supported 74
bundle support 73
connectivity support 71
destination support 80
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
28
finishing options 80
font support 81
Help feature support 75
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 73
included 9
installable options support 74
job storage support 77
job stream output support 70
job tracking 71
Linux operating systems 12
lockable features 31
Macintosh 11
media supported 295
paper source commands 294
paper supported 76
PJL encoding 71, 80
Point and Print installation 272
Postcript-specific features 82
Print Quality options 96
PS Emulation Driver features
143
quality settings 78
Quick Sets support 76
reordering options 78
resizing options 79
settings 83, 165
standalone 22
tray assignment 74
UNIX operating systems 11
user interface support 75
watermarks support 79
DSS (Digital Sending Software) 54
duplexing unit
custom paper sizes 115, 179
media supported 297
PCL traditional driver settings
92
print modes 92
unidriver configuration 215
unidriver settings 196
DWS (Driver Work Space) 141
E
e-mail alerts 36, 37
e-mail, sending to 39
Economode
PCL traditional drivers 100
PS Emulation Driver 150
Edge-to-Edge Printing
PCL traditional drivers 98
unidrivers 171
Edit Other Links page, HP
Embedded Web Server 36
Effects tab
PCL traditional drivers 103
unidrivers 188
EIO Jetdirect page, printing 32
Email Server page, HP Embedded
Web Server 36
embedded Web server. See HP
Embedded Web Server
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
about 28
Novell NetWare operating
systems supported 29
Windows operating systems
supported 28
envelopes, paper type commands
298
Index
escape sequences
paper source 294
paper type 298
euro character 31
event log 33
EWS. See HP Embedded Web
Server
External Fonts settings, PCL
unidrivers 211
F
Features dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 261
Typical Installation 247
features, printer 2
file layout for software CD-ROM
16
finishing options 80
Finishing tab
PCL traditional drivers 87
unidrivers 194
firmware
determining current level 55
downloading 55
FTP updates, Macintosh 60
FTP updates, Windows 56
HP Web Jetadmin updates 61
LPR command updates 61
Macintosh, updating 60
messages during update 62
troubleshooting updates 63
UNIX updates 60
updating remotely 54
verifying installation 63
Windows network updates 59
Windows, local port update 58
First Page paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 119
unidrivers 183
Fit to Page settings
PCL traditional drivers 104
PS Emulation Driver 150
Flip Pages Up
PCL traditional drivers 92
unidriver settings 196
Font Substitution Table, PS
Emulation Unidriver 212
fonts
DIMM settings, PCL traditional
drivers 139
DIMM settings, unidrivers 211
driver support 81
euro character 31
External, PCL unidrivers 211
included 3
Macintosh 278
PS 3 emulation 144
PS Emulation Driver 161, 215
PS Emulation Driver settings
147
Send TrueType as Bitmap,
PCL traditional drivers 97,
100
Send TrueType as Bitmap,
PCL unidrivers 171
substitution table, PS
Emulation Driver 160
substitution table, PS
Emulation Unidriver 213
TrueType download option 82
watermarks 107
Windows 222, 224
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
54
Form to Tray Assignment
PS Emulation Driver 159
unidrivers 210
Front Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 117
unidrivers 181
Front to Back printing, unidrivers
171
FTP
command-line printing,
Macintosh 68
command-line printing,
Windows 65
firmware updates, Macintosh
60
firmware updates, Windows 56
G
Graphic settings
PCL traditional drivers 99
PS Emulation Driver 147
unidrivers 169
guides. See documentation
H
hard disk
303
PS Emulation Driver settings
162
unidriver settings 217
heavy paper, paper type
commands 298
help
Bubble 86
Macintosh 278
operating systems supported
75
PCL traditional drivers 85
PS Emulation Driver 144
unidrivers 166
HP Device Installer Customization
Wizard 15
HP Digital Sending Software 54
HP Driver Preconfiguration
downloading 12
driver support 73
status, PCL traditional drivers
133
support guide 15
HP Embedded Web Server
about 32, 277
alerts page 36
AutoSend page 36
Configuration Page 34
Configure Device page 36
Device Information page 33, 36
Device Status page 33
Digital Sending tab 39
documentation 14
Email Server page 36
HP Web Jetadmin 32
Information tab 33
language, setting 36
linking to HP Toolbox 51
links 33, 36
navigation 32
Networking tab 45
Security page 36, 39
Settings tab 36
time settings 36
user guide 32
HP Instant Support 33
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
15
HP Jetdirect page, printing 32
HP LaserJet Screen Font Installer
286
304
HP LaserJet Utility
firmware updates 60
printing print-ready files 69
HP Network Registry Agent
(HPNRA) 28
HP PCL tradtional drivers. See
PCL tradtional drivers
HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL
unidrivers
HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See
PS Emulation Unidriver
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box, Windows 233
HP Toolbox
Alerts tab 50
bidirectional communication 28
browsers supported 47
disabling 299
frame 48
installing 48
linking to HP Embeded Web
Server 51
opening 48
Other Links 51
Status tab 49
top banner 48
uninstalling from Macintosh
299
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver. See PS
Emulation Driver
HP Web Jetadmin
about 52
downloading 8
Driver Preonfiguration Plugin
30
firmware updates 61
HP Embedded Web Server 32
operating systems supported
53
HPNRA (HP Network Registry
Agent) 28
HTML files, viewing 13
I
IBM operating systems, supported
26
Identify Printer dialog box,
Windows 241
Ignore Application Collation
settings, PCL traditional drivers
137
inches, settings 116
Include types in application source
list option in drivers 141
Incompatible Print Settings
messages. See constraint
messages
Information tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 33
input trays. See trays
install notes 14
Installable Options
PS Emulation Driver 161
PS Emulation Unidriver 215
installation
Add Printer 254
Adobe Acrobat Reader 8
command-line silent 271
custom option 253
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic
284
dialog boxes, Mac OS X 287
dialog boxes, Windows 229
Installer Customization Wizard
for Windows 255
Macintosh printing-system
software 282
Point and Print 272
pre-existing, modifying 229
system requirements for
Macintosh and Linux
operating systems 276
system requirements for
Windows operating systems
221
Windows printing-system
software 228
Installation Type dialog box,
Windows 246
installers
availability by operating system
23
common, features 8
customizing 255
Screen Fonts, Macintosh 286
Instant Support 33
IP address, locating 32
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 15
Job Storage
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 139
operating systems supported
77
PCL traditional drivers 124
PS Emulation Driver settings
151, 153
unidriver settings 201, 217
job stream output support 70
Job Timeout settings, PS
Emulation Driver 161, 214
job tracking 71
L
landscape orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 92, 132
unidrivers 196
Language dialog box,
Customization Wizard 257
languages
Choose Setup Language
dialog box, Windows 231
HP Embedded Web Server 36
printing-system software 17
Layout Options, unidrivers 171
letterhead mode
PCL traditional drivers 141
unidrivers 170
license agreement dialog box,
Windows 233
links
HP Embedded Web Server
33, 36
HP Toolbox 51
Linux operating systems
driver availability 12
system requirements 276
local port command line printing,
Windows 66
localization, software components
17
lockable features, drivers 31
LPR commands
firmware updates 61
printing PDF files 69
Index
M
Macintosh operating systems
command-line printing 64, 68
components, software 277
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic
printing-system software
installation 284
dialog boxes, Mac OS X
printing-system software
installation 287
directory structure, software
CD-ROM 16
driver versions 11
firmware, updating 60
fonts supported 278
HP Embedded Web Server 277
HP Toolbox, uninstalling 299
install notes 278
installing printing-system
software 282
network setup 282, 283
online help 278
PDEs 277
PPDs 277
printing print-ready files with
HP LaserJet Utility 69
Screen Fonts installer 286
setting up products with Mac
OS X 283
supported 26
system requirements 276
uninstalling printing-system
software 283
manuals. See documentation
margins
Edge-to-Edge printing, PCL
traditional drivers 98
Edge-to-Edge printing,
unidrivers 171
PCL 6 Driver 297
measurement units 116
media. See paper
memory
included 2
installation requirements for
Macintosh and Linux
operating systems 276
installation requirements for
Windows operating systems
221
PCL traditional driver settings
141
PS Emulation Driver settings
160, 163, 213
unidriver settings 216, 217
messages, constraint
PCL traditional drivers 86
unidrivers 167
Microsoft Point and Print
installation 272
millimeters, settings 116
Model dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 260
model scripts, UNIX 11
moire effect, handling 98, 99
Mopier settings
PCL traditional drivers 137
PS Emulation Driver 163
unidrivers 217
More Configuration Options, PCL
traditional drivers 139
N
name printer dialog box
Customization Wizard 264
Typical Installation 248
Network Setup dialog box,
Windows 236
Networking tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 45
networks
accessories supported 54
bidirectional communication
support 72
command line printing 68
EIO Jetdirect page, printing 32
firmware updates 59
HP Driver Preconfiguration 30
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 15
Macintosh setup 282, 283
Macitnosh, setting up 282
Point and Print installation 272
Recommended Network Setup
dialog box, Windows 240
settings 46
Windows printing-system
software installation 228
305
Novell NetWare operating
systems, Enterprise
AutoConfiguration support 29
NT Forms tab, PCL traditional
drivers 134
number of copies, setting
PCL traditional drivers 132
PS Emulation Driver 145
unidrivers 169, 217
O
online help. See help
operating systems
availability of software
components 23
bidirectional communication
support 72
bins supported 74
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 28
Help feature support 75
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 73
Postscript feature support 82
standalone drivers 22
supported 26
user interface support 75
Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 170
Optional Paper Sources, PCL
traditional drivers 138
ordering supplies 8
orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 92, 132
PS Emulation Driver 145
unidrivers 196
Other Links, HP Toolbox 51
Other Pages paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 120
unidrivers 184
Output Protocol settings, PS
Emulation Driver 160, 214
Output Settings, PCL traditional
drivers 97, 99
Output tab
PCL traditional drivers 100
unidrivers 199
306
P
Page Layout Option, PS
Emulation Driver 147
Page Order settings
PCL traditional drivers 95
unidrivers 171, 198
page orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 92, 132
PS Emulation Driver 145
unidrivers 196
Page Setup tab, PS Emulation
Driver 144
Pages per Sheet settings
PCL traditional drivers 95
PS Emulation Driver 147
unidrivers 198
paper
Alternative Letterhead Mode,
PCL traditional drivers 141
Alternative Letterhead Mode,
unidrivers 170
custom sizes, PCL driver
support 297
custom sizes, PCL traditional
driver settings 112
custom sizes, PCL unidriver
settings 178
driver support 76
Include types in application
source list setting 141
margins 297
margins, PCL 6 driver 297
Pages per Sheet settings, PCL
traditional drivers 95
Pages per Sheet settings,
unidrivers 198
Print Document On settings,
PCL traditional drivers 104
Print Document On settings,
unidrivers 190
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 196
Print on Both Sides, PCL
traditional drivers 92
PS Emulation Driver settings
145
size commands 297
Size is settings, PCL traditional
drivers 110
Size is settings, unidrivers 177
sizes supported 4
source commands 294
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 111
Source is settings, unidrivers
180
sources and destinations 294
type commands 298
Type is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 111
Type is settings, unidrivers 180
types and sizes supported 295
types supported 297
Paper Handling Options, PCL
traditional drivers 136
Paper Options
PCL traditional drivers 110
unidrivers 176
Paper tab, PCL traditional drivers
109
Paper/Output settings
PS Emulation Driver 146
unidrivers 168
Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 171
PCL documents, printing 33
PCL files, command-line printing
64
PCL traditional drivers
about 9
About button 132
accessing 84
Alternative Letterhead Mode
141
alternative source support 80
Basics tab 130
bidirectional communication
support 72
bins supported 74
bins, selecting 102
bundle support 73
Configuration Status 133
Configure tab 135
connectivity support 71
custom paper sizes 297
destination support 80
Document Options 91
Edge-to-Edge Printing 98
Effects tab 103
features 84
finishing options 80
Finishing tab 87
font support 81
Graphic settings 99
Help feature support 75
Help system 85
Include types in application
source list setting 141
installable options support 74
Job Storage 124
job storage support 77
Job Storage, enabling 139
job stream output support 70
job tracking 71
margins 297
media supported 295
memory settings 141
Mopier Enabled settings 137
More Configuration Options
139
NT Forms tab 134
operating systems supported
23
Optional Paper Sources 138
Output Settings 97, 99
Output tab 100
Paper Handling Options 136
Paper Options 110
paper size commands 297
paper source commands 294
paper supported 76
Paper tab 109
paper type commands 298
PJL encoding 71
preconfiguration support 73
Print Quality Details settings
96, 98
Print Quality group box 96
Print Task Quick Sets 88
product image 123
quality settings 78
reordering options 78
resizing options 79
tray assignment 74
user interface support 75
Watermarks settings 105
watermarks support 79
PCL unidrivers
about 9
accessing 166
Advanced tab 167
Index
Alternative Letterhead Mode
170
alternative source support 80
Automatic Configuration 215
bidirectional communication
support 72
bins supported 74
bins, selecting 201
bundle support 73
connectivity support 71
Copy Count settings 169
custom paper sizes 297
destination support 80
Device Settings tab 209
Document Options 170
document preview image 188
Edge-to-Edge Printing 171
Effects tab 188
External Fonts settings 211
features 166
finishing options 80
Finishing tab 194
Font DIMM Installer 211
font support 81
Form to Tray Assignment 210
Graphic settings 169
Help feature support 75
Help system 166
Installable Options 215
installable options support 74
Job Storage 201
job storage support 77
job stream output support 70
job tracking 71
Layout Options 171
media supported 295
Mopier settings 217
operating systems supported
23
Output tab 199
Paper Options 176
paper size commands 297
paper supported 76
paper type commands 298
Paper/Output settings 168
Paper/Quality tab 171
PJL encoding 71
preconfiguration support 73
Print Optimizations option 170
Print Task Quick Sets 172
Properties tabs 209
quality settings 78
reordering options 78
Resizing Options 190
resizing options 79
Rotate feature 199
tray assignment 74
user interface support 75
Watermarks settings 191
watermarks support 79
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)
277
PDF files
command-line printing 64
LPR commands, printing 69
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 33
viewing 12
Percentage of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 105
unidrivers 191
PINs, Job Storage
PCL traditional drivers 127
PS Emulation Driver 154
unidrivers 205
PJL encoding 71
Point and Print installation,
Windows printing-system
software 272
port selection dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 258
Typical Installation 237
portrait orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 92, 132
unidrivers 196
PostScript Device settings 213
postscript documents, printing 33
PostScript Options, PS Emulation
Driver 148
Postscript printer description
(PPD) files 277
PPD (postscript printer
description) files 277
pre-existing installation, modifying
229
preconfiguration, driver 30
Preparing to Install dialog box,
Windows 231
preview image, document 199
Print All Text as Black
307
PCL traditional drivers 98, 99
unidrivers 171
Print Document On settings
PCL traditional drivers 104
unidrivers 190
Print Job Management dialog box,
Windows 239
print modes 92
Print on Both Sides
PCL traditional driver settings
92
unidriver settings 196
Print Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 170
Print Page Borders settings
PCL traditional drivers 95
unidrivers 198
Print Quality Details, PCL
traditional drivers 96, 98
Print Task Quick Sets, PCL
traditional drivers
about 88
defaults 89
use guide 91
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
about 172
custom 176
defaults 173
use guide 175
print-ready files
command-line printing 64
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 33
printing with HP LaserJet
Utility, Macintosh 69
Printer Connection dialog box,
Typical Installation 234
printer control panel settings
traditional drivers 83
unidrivers 165
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)
277
Printer Features options, PS
Emulation Driver 149
Printer Location and Comment
dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 267
Typical Installation 251
Printer Name dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 264
308
Typical Installation 248
Printer Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 258
Printer Sharing dialog box,
Windows
Customization Wizard 265
Typical Installation 249
printer, setting default 273
printing 14
printing files using HP Embedded
Web Server 33
Private job settings
PCL traditional drivers 127
PS Emulation Driver 154
unidrivers 205
PRN files, printing 33
product image 123
product support 33
Proof and Hold job settings
PCL traditional drivers 126
PS Emulation Driver 153
unidrivers 204
Properties tabs
PCL traditional drivers 134
unidrivers 209
protocols
configuring 47
PS Emulation Driver 160, 214
PS 3 font emulation 144
PS Emulation Driver
about 9
Advanced tab 145
alternative source support 80
bidirectional communication
support 72
bins supported 74
bins, selecting 149
bundle support 73
collation settings 150
connectivity support 71
context-sensitive help 144
Ctrl-D settings 160, 214
destination support 80
Device Settings tab 157
Document Default settings,
accessing 143
Document Options 147
Economode 150
features 82, 143
finishing options 80
Fit to Page 150
font settings 147, 161, 215
font support 81
Form to Tray Assignment 159
Graphic settings 147
help 144
Help feature support 75
Installable Options 161
installable options support 74
Job Storage 151
job storage support 77
job stream output support 70
job tracking 71
media supported 295
operating systems supported
23
Output Protocol settings 160,
214
Page Layout Option 147
Page Setup tab 144
paper supported 76
Paper/Output settings 146
PJL encoding 71
PostScript Device settings 213
PostScript Memory settings
160, 213
PostScript Options 148
preconfiguration support 73
Print Quality group box 96
Printer Features 149
Properties, accessing 143
PS 3 font emulation 144
quality settings 78
reordering options 78
resizing options 79
Stapling Options 149
timeout settings 161, 214
tray assignment 74
user interface support 75
watermarks support 79, 150
PS emulation fonts 224
PS Emulation Unidriver
about 9
accessing 166
Advanced tab 167
Alternative Letterhead Mode
170
alternative source support 80
Automatic Configuration 215
bidirectional communication
support 72
bins supported 74
bins, selecting 201
bundle support 73
connectivity support 71
Copy Count settings 169
destination support 80
Device Settings tab 209
Document Options 170
document preview image 188
Edge-to-Edge Printing 171
Effects tab 188
features 82, 166
finishing options 80
Finishing tab 194
Font DIMM Installer 211
Font Substitution Table 212,
213
font support 81
Form to Tray Assignment 210
Graphic settings 169
Help feature support 75
Help system 166
Installable Options 215
installable options support 74
Job Storage 201
job storage support 77
job stream output support 70
job tracking 71
Layout Options 171
media supported 295
Mopier settings 217
Output tab 199
Paper Options 176
paper supported 76
Paper/Output settings 168
Paper/Quality tab 171
PJL encoding 71
preconfiguration support 73
Print Task Quick Sets 172
Properties tabs 209
quality settings 78
reordering options 78
Resizing Options 190
resizing options 79
Rotate feature 199
tray assignment 74
user interface support 75
Watermarks settings 191
Index
watermarks support 79
PS files, command-line printing 64
Q
quality, driver support 78
Quick Copy job settings
PCL traditional drivers 127
PS Emulation Driver 154
unidrivers 205
Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick
Sets
R
Ready to Install dialog box,
Windows 252
Recommended Network Setup
dialog box, Windows 240
regional versions for printingsystem software 17
releasing Job Storage jobs 129,
208
remote firmware updates
about 54
determining current firmware
level 55
downloading 55
FTP, Windows 56
HP Web Jetadmin 61
LPR commands 61
Macintosh 60
messages 62
troubleshooting 63
UNIX 60
verifying installation 63
Windows network 59
Windows, using local port 58
reordering options 78
resizing options 79
Resizing Options, unidrivers 190
resolution, driver support 78
resolution, PCL Traditional Driver
settings 99
resolution, PCL traditional driver
settings 97
RFU. See remote firmware updates
Rotate feature, unidrivers 199
RTF files, viewing 13
S
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature
98, 99
Scale to Fit setting
PCL traditional drivers 104
unidrivers 190
Screen Fonts installer, Macintosh
286
screen-readable documentation
13
Security page, HP Embedded
Web Server 36, 39
Send Ctrl-D settings, PS
Emulation Driver 160, 214
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
PCL traditional drivers 97, 100
PCL unidrivers 171
sending to e-mail 39
serial number 33
settings
locking 31
overriding 83, 165
Print Task Quick Sets,
PCL traditional drivers 88
Print Task Quick Sets,
unidrivers 172
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web
Server 36
sharing setup dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 265
Typical Installation 249
silent installation
command-line 271
Customization Wizard 255
sizes, paper
commands 297
custom 297
margins 297
PCL Traditional Driver settings
110
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 196
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 92
PS Emulation Driver settings
145
supported 295
unidriver settings 177
smart duplexing 196
Source is settings
PCL traditional drivers 111
unidrivers 180
sources, paper. See trays
309
Specify Printer dialog box,
Windows 259
standalone drivers 22
Stapling Options, PS Emulation
Driver 149
status
devices 33
supplies 33
Status tab, HP Toolbox 49
storage, job
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 139
operating systems supported
77
PCL traditional drivers 124
PS Emulation Driver 151
PS Emulation Driver settings
153
unidriver settings 201, 217
Stored job settings
PCL traditional drivers 127
PS Emulation Driver 155
unidrivers 206
substitution table for fonts, PS
Emulation Driver 160
supplies
AutoSend page, HP
Embedded Web Server 36
ordering 8
usage AutoSend page 36
viewing status 33
support, product 33
system requirements
Macintosh and Linux 276
Windows 221
T
TBCP output protocol, PS
Emulation Driver 160, 214
TCP/IP address, locating 32
text files, command-line printing
64
text, printing all as black
PCL traditional drivers 98, 99
unidriver 171
time settings, HP Embedded Web
Server 36
timeout settings, PS Emulation
Driver 161, 214
Toolbox
310
Alerts tab 50
bidirectional communication 28
browsers supported 47
disabling 299
frame 48
installing 48
linking to HP Embedded Web
Server 51
opening 48
Other Links 51
Status tab 49
top banner 48
uninstalling from Macintosh
299
traditional drivers. See PCL
traditional drivers; PS Emulation
Driver
transparencies, paper type
commands 298
trays
autoconfiguration 12, 27
custom paper sizes 115, 179
driver support 74
included 294
Installable Options, PS
Emulation Driver 161
media supported 297
paper source commands 294
paper type commands 298
PCL traditional driver settings
138
PS Emulation Driver Form to
Tray Assignment 159
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 111
Source is settings, unidrivers
180
unidriver configuration 215
unidriver Form to Tray
Assignment 210
Windows NT configuration 134
troubleshooting firmware updates
63
TrueType font settings
PS Emulation Driver 147,
161, 215
Send as Bitmap, PCL
traditional drivers 97, 100
Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers
171
substitution table, PS
Emulation Driver 160
two-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
92
unidriver settings 196
TXT files, command-line printing
64
types, paper
Include in application source
list setting 141
PCL traditional drivers settings
111
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 196
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 92
supported 297
unidriver settings 180
Typical Installation
choosing 7
dialog boxes, Windows 229
U
unattended installation
command-line 271
Customization Wizard 255
unidrivers
accessing 166
Advanced tab 167
Alternative Letterhead Mode
170
alternative source support 80
Automatic Configuration 215
automatic configuration 28
bidirectional communication
support 72
bins supported 74
bins, selecting 201
bundle support 73
connectivity support 71
constraint messages 167
Copy Count settings 169
custom paper sizes 297
destination support 80
Device Settings tab 209
Document Options 170
document preview image 188
Edge-to-Edge printing 171
Effects tab 188
features 166
finishing options 80
Finishing tab 194
Font DIMM Installer 211
font support 81
Form to Tray Assignment 210
Graphic settings 169
Help feature support 75
Help system 166
Installable Options 215
Job Storage 201
job storage support 77
job stream output support 70
job tracking 71
Layout Options 171
media supported 295
Mopier settings 217
operating systems supported
23
Output tab 199
Paper Options 176
paper size commands 297
paper supported 76
paper type commands 298
Paper/Output settings 168
Paper/Quality tab 171
PJL encoding 71
preconfiguration support 73
Print Task Quick Sets 172
Properties tabs 209
quality settings 78
reordering options 78
Resizing Options 190
resizing options 79
Rotate feature 199
tray assignment 74
user interface support 75
Watermarks settings 191
watermarks support 79
uninstalling Macintosh software
HP Toolbox 299
printing-system 283
units of measurement 116
UNIX operating systems
command-line printing 68
driver availability 11
print-ready printing 68
remote firmware update 60
Update Now feature 12, 28
Index
updating firmware remotely. See
remote firmware update
usage page 33
Use Different Paper/Covers
PCL traditional drivers 117
Use Different Paper/Covers,
unidrivers 181
user guide
Print Task Quick Set, PCL
traditional drivers 91
Print Task Quick Set, unidrivers
175
viewing 12
W
Wait Timeout settings, PS
Emulation Driver 161, 214
Watermarks settings
drivers supported 79
PCL traditional drivers 105
PS Emulation Driver 150
unidrivers 191
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
Adobe 144
downloading software 22
firmware download 55
HP Driver Preconfiguration 12
HP Embedded Web Server 32
HP Embedded Web Server links
33
HP Web Jetadmin 53
links, HP Embedded Web
Server 36
Linux product support 276
support links 8
UNIX model scripts 11
Welcome dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 256
Typical Installation 232
What's this? Help
PS Emulation Driver 144
unidrivers 166
Windows operating systems
availability of software
components 23
CD-ROM, print system 6
command-line printing 64
command-line printing, local
port 66
command-line printing,
networks 68
custom installation, printingsystem software 253
default printer, setting 273
dialog boxes, Typical Installation
229
directory structure, software
CD-ROM 16
driver versions 10
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 28
fonts supported 222
Installer Customization Wizard
255
installers 23
installing printing software 228
LPR commands 69
NT Forms tab, PCL traditional
drivers 134
PCL traditional drivers features
84
Point and Print installation 272
PS Emulation Driver features
143
PS emulation fonts supported
224
remote firmware update 58
supported 26
system requirements 221
unidriver features 166
versions supported 220
311
312
© 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com